Instrukcja obsługi Infiniti EX35 - 2011

Infiniti Samochód osobowy EX35 - 2011

Przeczytaj poniżej 📖 instrukcję obsługi w języku polskim dla Infiniti EX35 - 2011 (480 stron) w kategorii Samochód osobowy. Ta instrukcja była pomocna dla 4 osób i została oceniona przez 2 użytkowników na średnio 4.5 gwiazdek

Pobierz PDF

Strona 1/480

2011 Inﬁniti EX Owner’s Manual

Printing: February 2011 (11) / OM1E 0J50U2 / Printed in U.S.A.

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2011 Inﬁniti EX

Your INFINITI represents a new way of thinking

about vehicle design. It integrates advanced

engineering and superior craftsmanship with a

simple, refined aesthetic sensitivity associated

with traditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury and

beauty. The car itself is important, but so is the

sense of harmony that the vehicle evokes in its

driver, and the sense of satisfaction you feel

with the INFINITI — from the way it looks and

drives to the high level of retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to the

fullest, we encourage you to read this Owner’s

Manual immediately. It explains all of the fea-

tures, controls and performance characteristics

of your INFINITI; it also provides important

instructions and safety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet is in-

cluded in your Owner’s literature portfolio. The

INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide ex-

plains details about maintaining and servicing

your vehicle. Always carry it with you when you

take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer. The War-

ranty Information Booklet contents provide

complete information about all warranties cov-

ering this vehicle, the requirements to keep the

warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI Road-

side Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care and

Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain how

to resolve any concerns you may have with your

vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your

state’s lemon law.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity

with controls and maintenance requirements,

assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS

FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help

ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and

your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or

drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and

never drive too fast for conditions.

●ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate

child restraint systems. Pre-teen children

should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to all

occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for im-

portant safety information.

FOREWORD

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modifica-

tion could affect its performance, safety or dura-

bility, and may even violate governmental regu-

lations. In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from modification will not be

covered under the INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options

available on this model. Therefore, you may find

some information that does not apply to your

vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations

in this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. INFINITI reserves the right to change

specifications or design at any time without

notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-

ard that could cause death or serious personal

injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the proce-

dures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a haz-

ard that could cause minor or moderate per-

sonal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid

or reduce the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed carefully.

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not

do this” or “Do not let this happen” .

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the

front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above indicate movement or action.

SIC0697

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above call attention to an item in the

illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and

certain vehicle components contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products of com-

ponent wear contain or emit chemicals known

to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries,

may contain perchlorate material. The following

advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material -

special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Bluetooth姞is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc., U.S.A.

Gracenote姞is a registered

trademark of Gracenote,

Inc. The Gracenote logo

and logo type, and the

“Powered by Gracenote”

logo are trademarks of

Gracenote.

XM Radio姞requires

subscription, sold

separately. Not available

in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

For more information, visit

www.xmradio.com.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or

by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-

copying, recording or otherwise, without

the prior written permission of Nissan Motor

Co., Ltd.

INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

INFINITI CARES ...

Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your INFINITI retailer

are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your

INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide INFINITI directly with

comments or questions, please contact our

(INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs Department using

our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-662-6200

For Canadian customers

1-800-361-4792

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (on dash

panel)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your INFINITI retailer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to INFINITI with the information on

the left at:

For U.S. customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and thank you for buying a quality INFINITI vehicle.

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system (SRS) ..................................... 0-2

Exterior front...................................... 0-3

Exterior rear ......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ........................... 0-5

Cockpit...........................................0-6

Instrument panel ..................................0-8

Meters and gauges ................................0-9

Engine compartment.............................. 0-10

VQ35HR engine ............................... 0-10

Warning and indicator lights .......................0-11

1. Rear seat power folding/return switch

(Page 1-4)

2. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P. 1-33)

3. Head restraints (P. 1-6)

4. Seat belts (P. 1-12)

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bags (P. 1-37)

6. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-37)

7. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-22)

8. Rear armrest (P. 1-12)

9. Rear seats (P. 1-4)

— Child restraints (P. 1-20)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags (P. 1-37)

11. Seat belt pretensioner (P. 1-48)

12. Occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor) (P. 1-42)

13. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-44)

SSI0417

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Hood (P. 3-16)

2. Headlight and turn signal (P. 2-34)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-26)

— Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (if

so equipped) (P. 2-37)

3. Windshield wiper and washer (P. 2-32)

— Maintenance (P. 8-17)

4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

5. Roof rack (if so equipped) (P. 2-50)

6. Power windows (P. 2-50)

7. Outside mirrors (P. 3-23)

— Side view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-27)

— Welcome light (P. 2-54)

8. Doors

— Keys (P. 3-2)

— Door locks (P. 3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-13)

9. Recovery hook (P. 6-14)

10. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-27)

11. Sonar sensor

— Around View Monitor (if so equipped)

(P. 4-27)

12. Fog light (P. 2-39)

13. Tires

— Wheel and tires (P. 8-28, P. 9-8)

— Flat tire (P. 6-2)

— Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) (P. 2-15, P. 5-3)

SSI0383

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rearview camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-22, P. 4-27)

2. Lift gate (P. 3-16)

— Intelligent Key system (P. 3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P. 3-13)

3. Rear window defroster (P. 2-34)

4. High-mounted stop light (bulb replace-

ment) (P. 8-24)

5. Rear window wiper and washer (P. 2-33)

— Maintenance (P. 8-19)

6. Antenna (P. 4-91)

7. Sonar sensor

— Around View Monitor (if so equipped)

(P. 4-27)

8. Rear combination light (bulb replace-

ment) (P. 8-24)

9. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-17)

— Fuel recommendation (P. 9-3)

10. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)

SSI0384

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Coat hooks (P. 2-48)

2. Seat-mounted jacket hanger (P. 2-47)

3. Rear personal light (P. 2-55)

4. Power window controls (P. 2-50)

— Outside mirror remote control switch

(P. 3-23)

5. Automatic drive positioner switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-24)

6. Sun visors (P. 3-20)

7. Moonroof switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-52)

8. Map light (P. 2-54)

9. Sunglasses holder (P. 2-46)

10. Inside rearview mirror (P. 3-21)

— HomeLink姞(if so equipped) (P. 2-57)

— Compass (if so equipped) (P. 2-8)

11. Cargo cover (if so equipped) (P. 2-48)

12. Rear cup holders (P. 2-45)

13. Console box

— Power outlet (P. 2-44)

— USB memory operation (P. 4-70)

— iPod姞player operation (P. 4-79)

14. Front cup holders (P. 2-45)

SSI0401

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer

(P. 2-6)

2. Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-38)

3. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

(P. 2-34)

4. Trip computer switch (P. 2-27)

5. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-32)

6. Warning systems switch (if so equipped)

— Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

(P. 5-66)

— Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

(P. 5-17)

— Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

(P. 5-25)

7. Hood release handle (P. 3-16)

8. Intelligent Key port (P. 5-10)

9. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P. 5-82)

10. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-43)

11. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel

lever (if so equipped) (P. 3-19)

12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(Left side)

— For audio system (P. 4-90)

— For Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem (with navigation system)

(P. 4-93)

— For Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem (without navigation system)

(P. 4-103)

— For INFINITI Voice Recognition System

(if so equipped) (P. 4-116)

13. Manual tilting/telescopic steering wheel

lever (if so equipped) (P. 3-19)

14. Steering wheel

— Horn (P. 2-40)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-37)

SSI0623

COCKPIT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control switches (P. 5-32)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-34)

— Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-17)

— Distance Control Assist (DCA) switch (if

so equipped) (P. 5-54)

16. Center-console-mounted controls

— Heated seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-40)

— Rear seat power return switches

(if so equipped) (P. 1-4)

— SNOW mode switch (P. 2-43)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

1. Side ventilator (P. 4-38)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-5)

3. Center ventilator (P. 4-38)

4. Center display (P. 4-2)

5. Clock (P. 2-44)

6. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-39)

7. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system* (if so equipped)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons

(P. 4-8)

— Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System

(with navigation system) (P. 4-93)

— Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) (without navigation sys-

tem) (P. 4-103)

— Around View Monitor (if so equipped)

(P. 4-27)

— Rearview monitor (if so equipped)

(P. 4-22)

8. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-37)

9. Fuse box cover (P. 8-20)

10. Parking brake (P. 5-16)

11. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-8)

12. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-42)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-44)

14. Rear window defogger switch (P. 2-34)

15. Automatic climate control system

(P. 4-39)

16. Audio system (P. 4-48)

17. Glove box lid release handle (P. 2-46)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SSI0624

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

1. Tachometer (P. 2-7)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P. 2-11)

3. Speedometer (P. 2-6)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P. 2-7)

5. Dot matrix liquid crystal

display/Odometer/twin trip odometer

(P. 2-20)

6. Fuel gauge (P. 2-8)

SIC4694

METERS AND GAUGES

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

VQ35HR ENGINE

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P. 8-20)

2. Battery (P. 8-13)

3. Radiator filler cap (P. 8-6)

4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

7. Window washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

8. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

9. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)

10. Drive belts (P. 8-15)

11. Coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)

SSI0388

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light (AWD models)*

2-12

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

2-12

Automatic Transmission (AT)

check warning light

2-13

Brake warning light 2-13

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sys-

tem warning light (orange)*

2-13

Charge warning light 2-13

Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system warning light (orange)*

2-14

Engine oil pressure warning

light

2-14

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system warning light (orange)*

2-14

Warning

light

Name Page

Intelligent Key system warning

light

2-14

Lane departure warning light

(orange)*

2-14

Low tire pressure warning light 2-15

Low washer fluid warning light 2-16

Master warning light 2-16

Preview Function warning light

(orange)*

2-16

Seat belt warning light 2-16

Supplemental air bag warning

light

2-16

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light

2-17

Indica-

tor light

Name Page

Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) indicator light

2-17

Indica-

tor light

Name Page

Automatic Transmission (AT)

position indicator light

2-17

Front fog light indicator light 2-18

Front passenger air bag status

light

2-18

High beam indicator light 2-18

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off

indicator light*

2-18

Lane Departure Prevention

(LDP) ON indicator light

(green)*

2-18

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

2-18

Security indicator light 2-19

Low beam indicator lights 2-19

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

2-19

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light

2-19

*: if so equipped

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system

Seats .............................................1-2

Front seats .....................................1-2

Rear seats ......................................1-4

Head restraints .................................1-6

Front-seat active head restraint...................1-9

Adjustable headrest .............................1-9

Armrest .......................................1-12

Seat belts ........................................1-12

Precautions on seat belt usage ..................1-12

Pregnant women ...............................1-15

Injured persons ................................1-15

Three-point type seat belt.......................1-15

Seat belt extenders.............................1-18

Seat belt maintenance ..........................1-18

Child safety.......................................1-19

Infants ........................................1-19

Small children .................................1-19

Larger children................................ 1-20

Child restraints .................................. 1-20

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-21

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH) System ............................... 1-22

Rear-facing Child restraint installation

using LATCH .................................. 1-24

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts ................................. 1-26

Forward-facing Child restraint installation

using LATCH .................................. 1-28

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ........................... 1-30

Installing top tether strap ...................... 1-33

Booster seats ................................. 1-34

Supplemental restraint system .....................1-37

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ........................................1-37

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System (front

seats) ........................................ 1-42

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact supplemental air bag

systems ...................................... 1-47

Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ...... 1-48

Supplemental air bag warning labels ........... 1-49

Supplemental air bag warning light ............. 1-49

Repair and replacement procedure.............. 1-50

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.

The shoulder belt will not be against your

body. In an accident, you could be thrown

into it and receive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when the

vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up-

right. Always sit well back in the seat with

both feet on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to

make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious accidents.

●The seatback should not be reclined further

than necessary for comfort. Seat belts are

most effective when the passenger sits well

back and straight up in the seat. If the seat

back is reclined, the risk of sliding under the

lap belt and being injured is increased.

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips :

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

See “AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for

the seat position memory function.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not

to contact any moving parts to avoid possible

injuries and/or damages.

SSS0133

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backward :

Moving the switch 䊊

1forward or backward will

slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

Reclining :

Move the recline switch 䊊

2backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch 䊊

2forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback

can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is

in the P (Park) position.

Seat lifter :

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle or height of the seat.

SSS1051 SSS1052

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Lumbar support (if so equipped) :

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver.

Type A

Push the front 䊊

1or back 䊊

2end of the switch

to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

Type B

Move the lever 䊊

1up or down to adjust the

seatback lumbar area.

REAR SEATS

CAUTION

When folding or returning the seatback(s) to

the upright position, to avoid injury to yourself

and others:

●Make sure that the seat path is clear before

moving the seat.

●When operating the rear power seatback re-

turn, make sure that the vehicle is stopped

and the transmission is in the P (Park)

position.

●Make sure the lid of the rear seat cup holders

is closed before folding the rear seatback.

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area

or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down

position. Use of these areas by passengers

without proper restraints could result in se-

rious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

●When returning the seatbacks to the upright

position, be certain they are completely se-

cured in the latched position. If they are not

completely secured, passengers may be in-

jured in an accident or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo

higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

Type A

SSS1028

Type B

SSS0836

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Power folding

Luggage room switch (Type A) :

Push the front side of the switch 䊊

1located on

the right side or left side of the luggage room.

The corresponding rear seatback will be folded

down automatically.

Push and hold the rear side of the switch 䊊

The corresponding rear seatback will be re-

turned automatically. A beep sounds once and

the rear seatback will rise up while holding the

switch. A beep sounds twice when the seatback

is fully returned in position.

Luggage room switch (Type B) :

Push the front side of the switch 䊊

1located on

the right side or left side of the luggage room.

The corresponding rear seatback will be folded

down automatically.

Center console switch :

Push and hold the switch located on the center

console. The corresponding rear seatback will

be returned automatically. A beep sounds once

and the rear seatback will rise up while holding

the switch. A beep sounds twice when the

seatback is fully returned in position.

Type A

SSS0828

Type B

SSS0853 SSS0829

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Components

1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

SSS0992 SSS0997 SSS0993

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-

ing the force that the seatback receives from

the occupant in a rear-end collision. The move-

ment of the head restraint helps support the

occupant’s head by reducing its backward

movement and helping absorb some of the

forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-

sions at low to medium speeds in which it is

said that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as

described earlier in this section.

ADJUSTABLE HEADREST

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement the

other vehicle safety systems. They may provide

additional protection against injury in certain

rear end collisions. Adjust the headrests prop-

erly, as specified in this section. Check the ad-

justment after someone else uses the seat. Do

not attach anything to the adjustable headrest

stalks or remove the adjustable headrests. Do

not use the seat if the adjustable headrests

have been removed. If the headrest was re-

moved, re-install and properly adjust the head-

rest before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion. Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable

headrests. This may increase the risk of serious

injury or death in a collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with adjustable headrests. The head-

rests are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with an adjustable headrest.

SSS0508 SSS1014

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Components

1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Adjustment

Adjust the headrest so the center is level with

the center of your ears.

To raise the headrest, pull it up.

SSS0992 SSS0997 SSS0993

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the headrest down. Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the

adjustable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest posi-

tion.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly in a secure

place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the headrest

before an occupant uses the seating po-

sition.

Install

1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure that the headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk with

the adjustment notches

䊊

must be in-

stalled in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an

occupant uses the seating position.

SSS0994 SSS0995 SSS0996

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

ARMREST

Rear armrest

Pull the tab and draw the armrest forward until

it is horizontal.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well

back in your seat with both feet on the floor,

your chances of being injured or killed in an

accident and/or the severity of injury may be

greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages

you and all of your passengers to buckle up

every time you drive, even if your seating

position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or ter-

ritories specify that seat belts be worn at all

times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0837

SEAT BELTS

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this ve-

hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Chil-

dren should be properly restrained in the

rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child

restraint.

●The seat belt should be properly adjusted to

a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the

effectiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of injury

in an accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

●Always route the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never put

the belt behind your back, under your arm or

across your neck. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not falling off

your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST.

A lap belt worn too high could increase the

risk of internal injuries in an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fas-

tened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

SSS0136A

SSS0134A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

●Do not allow more than one person to use the

same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle than

there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows continu-

ously while the ignition is turned ON with all

doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it

may indicate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

●No changes should be made to the seat belt

system. For example, do not modify the seat

belt, add material or install devices that may

change the seat belt routing or tension. Do-

ing so may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering with

the seat belt system may result in serious

personal injury.

●Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated,

it cannot be reused and must be replaced

together with the retractor. See an INFINITI

retailer.

●Removal and installation of pretensioner

system components should be done by an

INFINITI retailer.

●All seat belt assemblies, including retractors

and attaching hardware, should be in-

spected after any collision by an INFINITI re-

tailer. INFINITI recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be re-

placed unless the collision was minor and

the belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during a col-

lision should also be inspected and replaced

if either damage or improper operation is

noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hardware

should be inspected after any collision. Al-

ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-

spection instructions and replacement rec-

ommendations. The child restraints should

be replaced if they are damaged.

SSS0016

SSS0014

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

possible around the hips, not the waist, and

place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and

across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder

belt over your abdominal area. Contact your

doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this ve-

hicle should use a seat belt at all times.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous.

The shoulder belt will not be against your

body. In an accident, you could be thrown

into it and receive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when the

vehicle is in motion, the seat should be up-

right. Always sit well back in the seat with

both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in

this section.)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-

tor and insert the tongue into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock during a

sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling mo-

tion permits the belt to move, and allows you

some freedom of movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully

retracted position, firmly pull the belt and

release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

SSS0292

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your

shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger and rear passenger seating

positions’ three-point seat belts have two

modes of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to

allow the driver and passengers some freedom

of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat

belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for

child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in

this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for child

restraint installation. During normal seat belt

use by a passenger, the ALR mode should not be

activated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-

fortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain that

seatbacks are completely secured in the

latched position. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on

the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat

belt movement by two separate methods:

●When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

SSS0290 SSS0326

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check

or if you have any question about seat belt

operation, see an INFINITI retailer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (for

front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. (See

“PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” earlier in

this section.)

To adjust, push the button 䊊

A, and then move

the shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-

tion, so that the belt passes over the center of

the shoulder. The belt should be away from

your face and neck, but not falling off of your

shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock

the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjustment

button and try to move the shoulder belt

anchor up and down to make sure it is se-

curely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. Failure

to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an accident.

SSS0294A

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Rear center seat belt

The center seat belt buckle is identified by the

CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can

be fastened only into the center seat belt

buckle.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible

with the installed seat belts is available that

can be purchased. The extender adds approxi-

mately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be

used for either the driver or front passenger

seating position. See an INFINITI retailer for

assistance with purchasing an extender if an

extender is required.

WARNING

●Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made by

the same company which made the original

equipment seat belts, should be used with

the INFINITI seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the stan-

dard seat belt should not use an extender.

Such unnecessary use could result in seri-

ous personal injury in the event of an

accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install child

restraints. If the child restraint is not se-

cured properly, the child could be seriously

injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild

soap solution or any solution recommended

for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then,

wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to

dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts

to retract until they are completely dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of

the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may

retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide

with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat belt

and the metal components such as buckles,

tongues, retractors, flexible wires and an-

chors work properly. If loose parts, deterio-

ration, cuts or other damage on the webbing

is found, the entire seat belt assembly

should be replaced.

SSS0671

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Children need adults to help protect them. They

need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available

from many other sources, including doctors,

teachers, government traffic safety offices, and

community organizations. Every child is differ-

ent, so be sure to learn the best way to trans-

port your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear-facing child restraint

●Front-facing child restraint

●Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and

less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in

rear-facing child restraints. Front-facing child

restraints are available for children who out-

grow rear-facing child restraints and are at least

1 year old. Booster seats are used to help

position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child

who can no longer use a front-facing child

restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection.

The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them prop-

erly. The shoulder belt may come too close to

the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over

their small hip bones. In an accident, an im-

properly fitting seat belt could cause serious or

fatal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-

tories require the use of approved child re-

straints for infants and small children. (See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)

Also, there are other types of child restraints

available for larger children for additional pro-

tection.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens and chil-

dren be restrained in the rear seat. According to

accident statistics, children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

This is especially important because your ve-

hicle has a supplemental restraint system (air

bag system) for the front passenger. (See

“SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” later in

this section.)

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint. INFINITI

recommends that infants be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint which fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instructions for

installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufactur-

er’s instructions for minimum and maximum

weight and height recommendations. INFINITI

recommends that small children be placed in

child restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for in-

stallation and use.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat

belts which are provided. The seat belt may not

fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg)

and 80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be

used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

INFINITI recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially available booster seat if the

shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits

close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of

the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The

booster seat should raise the child so that the

shoulder belt is properly positioned across the

top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap

belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only

be used in seating positions that have a three-

point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit

the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that

it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. Once the child has grown so the

shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face

and neck, use the shoulder belt without the

booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and

do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the

vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0099

SSS0100

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of child

restraints could result in serious injury or

death of a child or other passengers in a

sudden stop or collision:

– The child restraint must be used and in-

stalled properly. Always follow all of the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never be held

on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult

cannot resist the forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a child

and another passenger.

– INFINITI recommends that all child re-

straints be installed in the rear seat. Stud-

ies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat. If you must install a

forward-facing child restraint in the front

seat, see “FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS” later in this section.

– Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System, never install a rear-facing child

restraint in the front seat. An inflating air

bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A

rear-facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that

will fit the child and vehicle. Some child

restraints may not fit properly in your

vehicle.

– Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand loads from child re-

straints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adult seat

belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether strap

should not be used in the front passenger

seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible af-

ter fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always be

placed in an appropriate child restraint

while in the vehicle.

●When the child restraint is not in use, keep it

secured with the LATCH system or a seat

belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose ob-

jects can injure occupants or damage the

vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become

very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system. Some child restraints include rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors.

For details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren (LATCH) System” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and small children of various sizes.

When selecting any child restraint, keep the

following points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certify-

ing that it complies with Federal Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint at all

times while the vehicle is being operated. Cana-

dian law requires the top tether strap on front-

facing child restraints to be secured to the des-

ignated anchor point on the vehicle.

LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERS FOR

CHILDREN (LATCH) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with the LATCH (Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system com-

patible child restraints. This system may also

be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compat-

ible system. With this system, you do not have

to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child

restraint.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install

child restraints in the rear outboard seating

positions only.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions

for proper use and installation of child re-

straints could result in serious injury or death

of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop

or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible child re-

straints only at the locations shown in the

illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the cen-

ter rear seating position using the LATCH

lower anchors. The child restraint will not

be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting

your fingers into the lower anchor area.

Feel to make sure there are no obstruc-

tions over the anchors such as seat belt

webbing or seat cushion material. The

child restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

LATCH system lower anchor locations

SSS0839

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the

seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this

system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint. Check your

child restraint for a label stating that it is

compatible with LATCH. This information may

also be in the instructions provided by the child

restraint manufacturer.

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor location

SSS0840

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

SSS0643

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

SSS0644

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Top tether anchor

WARNING

●If the cargo cover (if so equipped) contacts

the top tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor, remove the cargo cover

from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo

floor below its attachment location. If the

cargo cover is not removed, it may damage

the top tether strap during a collision.

●Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether

strap when it is attached to the top tether

anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does

not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is

not properly secured or cargo that contacts

the top tether strap may damage the top

tether strap during a collision. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion if the child restraint top tether strap is

damaged.

Top tether anchor point locations :

Anchor points are located on the back of each

seatback for all three seating positions of the

rear seat as shown.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“CHILD SAFETY” earlier in this section and

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section be-

fore installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchors.

SSS0841

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

SSS0648

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove

any additional slack from the anchor at-

tachments. Press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint

with your hand to compress the vehicle

seat cushion and seatback while tighten-

ing the webbing of the anchor attach-

ments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment path.

The child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try

to tug it forward and check to see if the

LATCH attachment holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the LATCH attachment as neces-

sary, or put the restraint in another seat

and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint or try installing by

using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

SSS0649

Rear-facing — step 3

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 4

SSS0650

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Not all child restraints fit in all types of

vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) must be used when install-

ing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR

mode will result in the child restraint not being

properly secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden

stop or collision.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“CHILD SAFETY” earlier in this section and

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section be-

fore installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat. Position

the child restraint on the seat. Always

follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions.

SSS0100

Rear-facing — step 1

SSS0100

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt re-

tractor is in the Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to the Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully

retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

Rear-facing — step 2

SSS0654

Rear-facing — step 3

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 4

SSS0656

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint to

compress the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The child

restraint should not move more than 1

inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug

it forward and check to see if the belt

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the seat belt

as necessary, or put the restraint in an-

other seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“CHILD SAFETY” earlier in this section and

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section be-

fore installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

Rear-facing — step 5

SSS0657

Rear-facing — step 6

SSS0658

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment path.

The child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try

to tug it forward and check to see if the

LATCH attachment holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the LATCH attachment as neces-

sary, or put the restraint in another seat

and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) must be used when install-

ing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR

mode will result in the child restraint not being

properly secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden

stop or collision.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before

installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in the

front seat, it should be placed in a forward-

facing direction only. Move the seat to the

rearmost position. Child restraints for in-

fants must be used in the rear-facing direc-

tion and, therefore, must not be used in the

front seat.

Forward-facing — step 6

SSS0638

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

SSS0640

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint

with your knee to compress the vehicle

seat cushion and seatback while pulling

up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The child

restraint should not move more than 1

inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug

it forward and check to see if the belt

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the seat belt

as necessary, or put the restraint in an-

other seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing — step 5

SSS0652

Forward-facing — step 6

SSS0653

Forward-facing — step 8

SSS0641

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not

illuminated, see “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Move the child restraint to another seat-

ing position. Have the system checked

by an INFINITI retailer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) is canceled.

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (rear outboard seating positions

only) or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the headrest

to position the top tether strap over the

top of the seatback. If the headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the headrest when the

child restraint is removed. See “ADJUST-

ABLE HEADREST” earlier in this section for

headrest adjustment, removal and instal-

lation information.

2. Secure the top tether strap to the tether

anchor point on the back of seatback

behind the child restraint.

Forward-facing — step 10

SSS0676 SSS0841

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

If necessary, raise or remove the headrest to

position the top tether strap over the top of the

seatback. If the headrest is removed, store it in

a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest

when the child restraint is removed. See ⬙Ad-

justable headrest⬙in this section for headrest

adjustment, removal and installation

information.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this sec-

tion before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a top

tether strap, consult your INFINITI retailer for

details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured in a

sudden stop or collision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt

is away from the child’s face and neck and

the lap portion of the belt does not cross

the stomach.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat 䊊

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat 䊊

2should be used.

LRS0455 LRS0453

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with

your child. Always follow all recommended

procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint at all

times while the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a

booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all warnings and cautions in the “CHILD

SAFETY” earlier in this section, “CHILD RE-

STRAINTS” earlier in this section and “BOOSTER

SEATS” earlier in this section before installing a

booster seat.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in

the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rearmost

position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a forward-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manufac-

turer’s instructions.

LRS0464 SSS0640

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint or headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head restraint or

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint

or headrest when the booster seat is re-

moved. See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in

this section or “ADJUSTABLE HEADREST” ear-

lier in this section for head restraint or

headrest adjustment, removal and installa-

tion information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest and it

is interfering with the proper booster seat

fit, try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure

to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the seat belt

routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat

belt toward the retractor to take up extra

slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the top, middle portion of

the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the

booster seat manufacturer’s instructions

for adjusting the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in the “SEAT BELTS” earlier in

this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, push the ignition switch

to the ON position. The front passenger

air bag status light may or may not

illuminate depending on the size of the

child and the type of booster seat used.

(See “Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section.)

Front passenger position

LRS0454 SSS0676

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the following systems.

●Driver and passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System)

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner cap

Supplemental front-impact air bag system: The

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest

of the driver and front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag system: This system can help cushion

the impact force to the chest and pelvis area of

the driver and front passenger in certain side

impact collisions. The front seat side-impact

supplemental air bags are designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemen-

tal air bag system: This system can help cushion

the impact force to the head of occupants in

front and rear outboard seating positions in

certain side impact collisions. The curtain air

bags are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection pro-

vided by the driver and passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the occu-

pant seated a suitable distance away from the

steering wheel, instrument panel and door fin-

ishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this section

for instructions and precautions on seat belt

usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion, the supplemental air bag warning light illu-

minates. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems

are operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in

the event of a side impact, rear impact, roll-

over, or lower severity frontal collision. Al-

ways wear your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not inflate if

the passenger air bag status light is lit or if

the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See

“Front passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are most

effective when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate

with great force. Even with the INFINITI Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways

or out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far-away as practical from

the steering wheel or instrument panel. Al-

ways use the seat belts.

SSS0131

SSS0132

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that de-

tect if the seat belts are fastened. The Ad-

vanced Air Bag System monitors the severity

of a collision and seat belt usage then in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure to prop-

erly wear seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor) that turns the front passenger air bag

OFF under some conditions. This sensor is

only used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in an

accident. See “Front passenger air bag and

status light” later in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steering

wheel. Placing them inside the steering

wheel rim could increase the risk of injury if

the supplemental front air bag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or ex-

tend their hands or face out of the window.

Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or

arms. Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the illustrations.

●Children may be severely injured or killed

when the front air bags, side air bags or

curtain air bags inflate if they are not prop-

erly restrained. Pre-teens and children

should be properly restrained in the rear

seat, if possible.

●Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, never install a rear facing child restraint

in the front seat. An inflating front air bag

could seriously injure or kill your child. See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section

for details.

SSS0099

SSS0100

SSS0832

SSS0833

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bags:

●The side air bags and curtain air bags ordi-

narily will not inflate in the event of a frontal

impact, rear impact, rollover or lower sever-

ity side collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity of

injury in various kinds of accidents.

●The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain

air bags are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the seat. The

side air bags and curtain air bags inflate with

great force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side air bags

on the side of the seatback of the front seat

or near the side roof rails. Do not allow any-

one sitting in the front seats or rear outboard

seats to extend their hand out of the window

or lean against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown in the

previous illustrations.

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold

onto the seatback of the front seat. If the

side air bags inflates, you may be seriously

injured. Be especially careful with children,

who should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front seat-

backs. They may interfere with side air bags

inflation.

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Front passenger air bag and status

light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to au-

tomatically turn OFF under some conditions.

Read this section carefully to learn how it oper-

ates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child

restraints is necessary for most effective pro-

tection. Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts

and child restraints can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

Status light :

The front passenger air bag status light

is located under the climate controls. After the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the

front passenger air bag status light illuminates

for about 7 seconds and then turns off or

illuminates depending on the front passenger

occupied status. The light operates as follows:

●Unoccupied passenger seat: The is

OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF

and will not inflate in a crash.

●Passenger seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The illuminates to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is OFF and

will not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied passenger seat and the passenger

meets the conditions outlined in this sec-

tion: The light is OFF to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag :

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as described

below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate

in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags

in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air

bag to certain front passenger seat occupants,

such as children, by requiring the air bag to be

automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-

sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and

is designed to detect an occupant and objects

on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front

passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is

designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations

is on the seat, the occupant classification sen-

sor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn

OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as

outlined in this manual should not cause the

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could cause the

sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to

be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for

the most effective protection by the seat belt

and supplemental air bag.

Front passenger air bag status light

SSS0676

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Do not place objects with sharp edges on the

seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the

seat that will leave permanent impressions

in the seat. Such objects can damage the

seat or occupant classification sensor (pat-

tern sensor). This can affect the operation of

the air bag system and result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-

age the seat or occupant classification sen-

sor. This can also affect the operation of the

air bag system and result in serious personal

injury.

●Immediately after inflation, several front air

bag system components will be hot. Do not

touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the air bag sys-

tem. This is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to your

vehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys-

tem or front end structure. This could affect

proper operation of the front air bag system.

●Tampering with the air bag system may re-

sult in serious personal injury. Tampering

includes changes to the steering wheel and

the instrument panel assembly by placing

material over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air bag

system.

●Modifying or tampering with the front pas-

senger seat may result in serious personal

injury. For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material on the seat cush-

ion or by installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, on the seat that is not

specifically designed to assure proper air

bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat or the

seat cushion and seatback. Such objects

may interfere with the proper operation of

the occupant classification sensor.

●No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the seat belt

system. This may affect the front air bag

system. Tampering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal injury.

●Work on and around the front air bag system

should be done by an INFINITI retailer. Instal-

lation of electrical equipment should also be

done by an INFINITI retailer. The Supplemen-

tal Restraint System (SRS) wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should not

be used on the air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be replaced im-

mediately by a qualified repair facility. A

cracked windshield could affect the function

of the supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yel-

low and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental front

air bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seatback

of the front seats. Also, do not place any

objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door finisher and the front seat. Such

objects may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several front seat-

mounted side air bags and roof-mounted

curtain air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the side air bag

and curtain air bags. This is to prevent dam-

age to or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to your

vehicle’s electrical system, suspension sys-

tem or side panel. This could affect proper

operation of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems.

●Tampering with the side air bag system may

result in serious personal injury. For ex-

ample, do not change the front seat by plac-

ing material near the seatback or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as seat

covers, around the side air bag.

●Work around and on the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems should be done by an

INFINITI retailer. Installation of electrical

equipment should also be done by an

INFINITI retailer. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on the

side air bag or curtain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yel-

low and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side-impact air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag system and

guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in

this Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front seats)

WARNING

●The pretensioners cannot be reused after ac-

tivation. They must be replaced together

with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision

but a pretensioner is not activated, be sure

to have the pretensioner system checked

and, if necessary, replaced by an INFINITI

retailer.

●No unauthorized changes should be made to

any components or wiring of the preten-

sioner system. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental activation of the pretension-

ers. Tampering with the pretensioner sys-

tem may result in serious personal injury.

●Work around and on the pretensioner sys-

tem should be done by an INFINITI retailer.

Installation of electrical equipment should

also be done by an INFINITI retailer. Unau-

thorized electrical test equipment and prob-

ing devices should not be used on the pre-

tensioner system.

●If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or

scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI re-

tailer. Correct pretensioner disposal proce-

dures are set forth in the appropriate

INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,

it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

becomes involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same

way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. The

smoke is not harmful, and it does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get

fresh air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters al-

low the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-

sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in the preten-

sioner system. If the operation of the supple-

mental air bag warning light indicates there is a

malfunction (See “SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT” in this section), have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle

as shown in the illustration.

SRS air bag

The warning labels 䊊

1are located on the

surface of the sun visors.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, dis-

playing in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits of the supplemental front-

impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag, roof-mounted curtain

side-impact supplemental air bag, and seat belt

pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits

include the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), satellite

sensors, occupant classification sensor, crash

zone sensor, front air bag modules, side air bag

modules, curtain air bag modules, pretension-

ers, front passenger air bag status light and all

related wiring.

SSS1016 SPA1097

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.

This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and

pretensioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on approximately 7 seconds after the

ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side

air bag, and curtain air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They must

be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to

the nearest INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on,

it could mean that the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner sys-

tems will not operate in an accident. To help

avoid injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon

as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

PROCEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioners are designed to acti-

vate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,

unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag

warning light will remain illuminated after infla-

tion has occurred. Repair and replacement of

these systems should be done only by an

INFINITI retailer.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain

air bags, pretensioners and related parts

should be pointed out to the person conducting

the maintenance. The ignition switch should

always be in the LOCK position when working

under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag or curtain

air bag has inflated, the air bag module will

not function again and must be replaced.

Additionally, the activated pretensioner

must also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner system should be replaced

by an INFINITI retailer. The air bag module

and pretensioner system cannot be

repaired.

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

systems and the pretensioner system

should be inspected by an INFINITI retailer if

there is any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle.

●If you need to dispose of a supplemental air

bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the

vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer. Correct

supplemental air bag and pretensioner sys-

tem disposal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incor-

rect disposal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Card holder................................... 2-47

Seat-mounted jacket hanger (if so

equipped) ....................................2-47

Coat hooks ...................................2-48

Luggage hooks................................2-48

Cargo cover (if so equipped) ...................2-48

Roof rack (if so equipped)...................... 2-50

Windows ........................................2-50

Power windows ............................... 2-50

Moonroof (if so equipped) ........................ 2-52

Automatic moonroof ........................... 2-52

Welcome light ................................... 2-54

Interior lights .................................... 2-54

Map lights.................................... 2-54

Personal lights................................ 2-55

Interior light control switch .................... 2-55

Vanity mirror lights............................... 2-56

Cargo light (if so equipped) .......................2-56

HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) . . . 2-57

Programming HomeLink姞...................... 2-57

Programming HomeLink姞for Canadian

customers .................................... 2-59

Operating the HomeLink姞Universal

Transceiver ................................... 2-59

Programming trouble-diagnosis................. 2-59

Clearing the programmed information ...........2-60

Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞button .....2-60

If your vehicle is stolen ........................2-60

1. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer

(P. 2-6)

2. Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-38)

3. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

(P. 2-34)

4. Trip computer switch (P. 2-27)

5. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-32)

6. Warning systems switch (if so equipped)

— Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

(P. 5-66)

— Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

(P. 5-17)

— Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

(P. 5-25)

7. Hood release handle (P. 3-16)

8. Intelligent Key port (P. 5-10)

9. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P. 5-82)

10. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-43)

11. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel

lever (if so equipped) (P. 3-19)

12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(Left side)

— For audio system (P. 4-90)

— For Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem (with navigation system)

(P. 4-93)

— For Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem (without navigation system)

(P. 4-103)

— For INFINITI Voice Recognition System

(if so equipped) (P. 4-116)

13. Manual tilting/telescopic steering wheel

lever (if so equipped) (P. 3-19)

14. Steering wheel

— Horn (P. 2-40)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-37)

SSI0623

COCKPIT

2-2 Instruments and controls

15. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control switches (P. 5-32)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-34)

— Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-17)

— Distance Control Assist (DCA) switch (if

so equipped) (P. 5-54)

16. Center-console-mounted controls

— Heated seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-40)

— Rear seat power return switches

(if so equipped) (P. 1-4)

— SNOW mode switch (P. 2-43)

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Side ventilator (P. 4-38)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-5)

3. Center ventilator (P. 4-38)

4. Center display (P. 4-2)

5. Clock (P. 2-44)

6. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-39)

7. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system* (if so equipped)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons

(P. 4-8)

— Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System

(with navigation system) (P. 4-93)

— Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) (without navigation sys-

tem) (P. 4-103)

— Around View Monitor (if so equipped)

(P. 4-27)

— Rearview monitor (if so equipped)

(P. 4-22)

8. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-37)

9. Fuse box cover (P. 8-20)

10. Parking brake (P. 5-16)

11. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-8)

12. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-42)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-44)

14. Rear window defogger switch (P. 2-34)

15. Automatic climate control system

(P. 4-39)

16. Audio system (P. 4-48)

17. Glove box lid release handle (P. 2-46)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SSI0624

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-4 Instruments and controls

1. Tachometer (P. 2-7)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P. 2-11)

3. Speedometer (P. 2-6)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P. 2-7)

5. Dot matrix liquid crystal

display/Odometer/twin trip odometer

(P. 2-20)

6. Fuel gauge (P. 2-8)

*: The needle indicators in the speedometer, ta-

chometer, engine coolant temperature gauge

and fuel gauge may move slightly after the

ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

This is not a malfunction.

SIC4694

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-5

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer 䊊

1and twin trip odometer 䊊

2are

displayed on the dot matrix crystal display

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display :

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch 䊊

3at the

bottom left of the combination meter panel

changes the display as follows:

TRIP A →TRIP B →TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer :

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch 䊊

3for more

than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to empty

information is also available. (See “DOT MATRIX

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section

and “HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice rec-

ognition systems” section.)

Speedometer

SIC4695

Odometer/twin trip odometer

SIC3259

2-6 Instruments and controls

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the engine

into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red zone,

shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed.

Operating the engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-

perature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range when the gauge needle points

within the zone 䊊

1shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range,

reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature.

If gauge is over the normal range, stop the

vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine

is overheated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine. See “IF

YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section for immediate action

required.

SIC4696 SIC4697

Instruments and controls 2-7

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the

ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers

“E” (Empty).

The low fuel warning appears on the dot

matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel tank

is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-

nient, preferably before the gauge reaches “E”.

There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank

when the fuel gauge needle reaches “E”.

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come

on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few

driving trips, the light should turn off.

If the light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI retailer.

●For additional information, see “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section. When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the compass display 䊊

Bwill indicate

the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass

by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at

less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also cali-

SIC4698 SIC3181

COMPASS (if so equipped)

2-8 Instruments and controls

brate the compass by driving your vehicle on

your everyday route. The compass will be cali-

brated once it has tracked 3 complete circles.

To turn on and off the compass manually, push

the switch 䊊

Awhile the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

Zone map

SIC0611B

Instruments and controls 2-9

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE

PROCEDURE

The difference between magnetic north and

geographical north is known as variance. In

some areas, this difference can sometimes be

great enough to cause false compass readings.

Follow these instructions to set the variance for

your particular location if this happens:

1. Push the switch for more than 3

seconds. The current zone number will

appear in the display.

2. Find your current location and variance

number on the zone map.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

3. Push the switch repeatedly until

the new zone number appears in the

display, then release the switch. After you

release the switch, the display will show a

compass direction within a few seconds.

●If the compass deviates from the correct

indication soon after repeated adjustment,

have the compass checked at an INFINITI

retailer.

●The compass may not indicate the correct

compass point in tunnels or while driving up

or down a steep hill.

(The compass returns to the correct compass

point when the vehicle moves to an area

where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which

are attached to the vehicle by means of a

magnet. They affect the operation of the

compass.

●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel

or similar material dampened with glass

cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly

on the mirror as it may cause the liquid

cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

2-10 Instruments and controls

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD

models)*

Intelligent Key warning light Front fog light indicator light

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light

Lane departure warning light (orange)* Front passenger air bag status light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light

Automatic transmission check warning

light

Low washer fluid warning light Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator

light*

Brake warning light Master warning light Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON indi-

cator light (green)*

Preview Function warning light (orange)* Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system warn-

ing light (orange)*

Seat belt warning light Security indicator light

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Low beam indicator light

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

warning light (orange)*

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) indi-

cator light*

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indica-

tor light

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

warning light (orange)*

Automatic transmission position indicator

light

*: if so equipped

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-11

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and push the ignition switch to the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on (if so equipped):

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off (if so equipped):

, or , , , ,

, , , ,

If any light does not come on, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec-

trical system. Have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played on the dot matrix crystal display be-

tween the speedometer and tachometer. (See

“DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in

this section.)

WARNING LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

warning light (AWD models)

The warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is pushed to ON. It turns off

soon after the engine is started.

If the AWD system malfunctions, or the diam-

eter of the front and the rear wheels are differ-

ent, the warning light will either remain illumi-

nated or blink. (See “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

CAUTION

●If the warning light comes on while driving

there may be a malfunction in the AWD sys-

tem. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your

vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as

soon as possible.

●If the AWD warning light blinks on when you

are driving:

– blinks rapidly (about twice a second):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. The driving mode will change to

2WD to prevent the AWD system from

malfunctioning. If the warning light turns

off, you can drive again.

– blinks slowly (about once every 2 sec-

onds):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. Check that all tire sizes are the

same, tire pressure is correct and tires are

not worn.

●If the warning light is still on after the above

operations, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This indi-

cates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may

indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-

tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.)

2-12 Instruments and controls

Automatic transmission

check warning light

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If

the light comes on at any other time, it may

indicate the transmission is not functioning

properly. Have your INFINITI retailer check and

repair the transmission.

or Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator :

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light comes on when the parking brake is

applied.

Low brake fluid warning light :

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light comes on while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. (See “BRAKE FLUID” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indica-

tor :

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

brake system checked, and if necessary re-

paired, by an INFINITI retailer promptly. (See

“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”

earlier in this section.)

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working prop-

erly if the warning light is on. Driving could

be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive

carefully to the nearest service station for

repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the engine

stopped and/or low brake fluid level may

increase your stopping distance and braking

will require greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the minimum

or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do

not drive until the brake system has been

checked at an INFINITI retailer.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

system warning light

(orange; if so equipped)

If the light comes on in orange and remains on,

it may indicate that the BSW system is not

functioning properly. Although the vehicle is

still driveable, have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer. See “BLIND SPOT WARNING

(BSW) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is run-

ning, it may indicate the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, see

an INFINITI retailer immediately.

Instruments and controls 2-13

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI

retailer as soon as possible for tire replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper

operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular

tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire

pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less

than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not

operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of tires to

the four wheels correctly.

Low washer fluid warning

light

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid

is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary.

(See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the master warning light illuminates if any of

the following are displayed on the dot matrix

liquid crystal display:

●No key warning

●Low fuel warning

●Low washer fluid warning

●Parking brake release warning

●Door/lift gate open warning

●Loose fuel cap warning

●Check tire pressure warning

See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY”

later in this section.

Preview Function warning

light (orange; if so equipped)

The light comes on if there is a malfunction in

the Preview Braking system.

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle

in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the

engine, resume driving and set the ICC system

again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the sys-

tem is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is

still driveable under normal conditions, have the

vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat

belts. The light illuminates whenever the igni-

tion switch is pushed to the ON position, and

will remain illuminated until the driver’s seat

belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime

will sound for about 6 seconds unless the

driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front passen-

ger will illuminate if the seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied.

For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the

ON position, the system does not activate the

warning light for the front passenger.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

2-16 Instruments and controls

light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds

if the supplemental front air bag and supple-

mental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag

systems and/or pretensioner seat belt are op-

erational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and

pretensioner systems needs servicing and your

vehicle must be taken to your nearest INFINITI

retailer.

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint systems and/or the pretensioners seat

belt (air bag system) may not function properly.

For additional information, see “SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on,

it could mean that the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag systems and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an accident.

To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have

your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as

soon as possible.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light

The light will blink when the VDC system or the

traction control system is operating, thus alert-

ing the driver that the vehicle is nearing its

traction limits. The road surface may be slip-

pery.

When the vehicle dynamic control warning light

illuminates when the vehicle dynamic control

system is turned on, this light alerts the driver

to the fact that the vehicle dynamic control

system’s fail-safe mode is operating, for ex-

ample the vehicle dynamic control system may

not be functioning properly. Have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer. If a malfunction

occurs in the system, the vehicle dynamic con-

trol system function will be canceled but the

vehicle is still driveable. For additional informa-

tion, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Adaptive Front lighting

System (AFS) indicator light

(if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) indicator light will illuminate. The light

will turn off in about 1 second if the AFS is

operational.

If the AFS indicator light blinks, it may indicate

the AFS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)” later

in this section.

Automatic transmission

position indicator light

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the indicator shows the automatic

selector shift position. (See “AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.)

Instruments and controls 2-17

Front fog light indicator

light

The front fog light indicator light illuminates

when the front fog lights are on. (See “FOG

LIGHT SWITCH” later in this section.)

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )

will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

OFF depending on how the front passenger seat

is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light opera-

tion, see “INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM

(front seats)” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” sec-

tion of this manual.

High beam indicator

light

This light comes on when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

off indicator light (if so

equipped)

The light illuminates when the Intelligent Brake

Assist (IBA) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates that the Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

system is not operating.

When the IBA off indicator light illuminates

while the system is turned on (without the

warning chime sound), this light indicates that

the system control is temporarily unavailable.

When the IBA off indicator light illuminates with

the warning chime sound while the IBA system

is turned on, this light indicates that the system

may not be functioning properly. Park the ve-

hicle in a safe place. Check to see if the laser

sensor is clean. Turn the engine off, then restart

the engine.

If the IBA off indicator light illuminates after

following the procedures above, it may indicate

that the system is malfunctioning. Although the

vehicle is still driveable under normal condi-

tions, have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI

retailer. (See “INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA)

SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-

tion.)

Lane Departure Prevention

(LDP) ON indicator light

(green; if so equipped)

The light comes on in green when the Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system is turned on.

The light turns off when the system is turned

off.

NOTE:

This light is common with the lane departure

warning light (orange). (See “Lane departure

warning light” earlier in this section.)

For more details, see “LANE DEPARTURE WARN-

ING (LDW) SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVEN-

TION (LDP) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The malfunction indicator light may also come

on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check

to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and

2-18 Instruments and controls

closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine

is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is

not ready for an emission control system

inspection/maintenance test. (See “READINESS

FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in

the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section.)

Operation :

The malfunction indicator light will come on in

one of two ways:

●Malfunction indicator light on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on the dot

matrix liquid crystal display. If the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected by an INFINITI retailer. You do not

need to have your vehicle towed to the

retailer.

●Malfunction indicator light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control system

damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI

retailer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the retailer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without having

the emission control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could lead to poor drive-

ability, reduced fuel economy, and possible

damage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch is in

the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function

indicates the security system equipped on the

vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning, this

light will remain on while the ignition switch is

in the ON position. For additional information,

see “SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.

Low beam indicator light

The light illuminates when the front park, side

marker, tail and license plate lights are on.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) off indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic

control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-

cates that the vehicle dynamic control system

and traction control system are not operating.

Instruments and controls 2-19

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door is

opened while the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or LOCK

position with the Intelligent Key left in the

Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take

the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the

vehicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side door is

opened with the light switch in the or

position and the ignition switch in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime

The parking brake reminder chime will sound if

the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH

(7 km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop

the vehicle and release the parking brake.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound

will first occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,

the sound will always be heard even if the brake

pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the warning

sound is heard.

Lane departure warning chime (if so

equipped)

When the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) or

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system is on,

the chime sounds if the vehicle is traveling

close to either the left or the right of a traveling

lane with detectable lane markers.

See “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP)

SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-

tion for more details.

The dot matrix liquid crystal display 䊊

1is

located between the tachometer and the speed-

ometer, and it displays the automatic transmis-

sion position indicator, the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system (if so equipped), the Dis-

tance Control Assist (DCA) system (if so

equipped) information, the Intelligent Key op-

eration information and other warnings and

information.

SIC3252

DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

2-20 Instruments and controls

For detailed information about each system, see

the following sections:

●Automatic Transmission (AT)

– “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AU-

DIBLE REMINDERS” earlier in this section.

– “DRIVING THE VEHICLE” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.

●Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

– “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

SYSTEM (FULL SPEED RANGE)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

●Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

– “DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYS-

TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.

●Intelligent Key system

– “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion.

– “PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

Instruments and controls 2-21

SIC4686

2-22 Instruments and controls

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator

This indicator appears when the selector lever

is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start

by pushing the ignition switch with the brake

pedal depressed.

2. Steering lock release malfunction

indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the steering wheel

cannot be released from the LOCK position.

If this indicator appears, push the push-button

ignition switch while lightly turning the steering

wheel right and left.

3. Intelligent Key insertion indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key

needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key

port. (For example, the Intelligent Key battery is

discharged.)

If this indicator appears, insert the Intelligent

Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct

direction. (See “PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION

SWITCH” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-

tion.)

4. Intelligent Key removal indicator

This indicator appears when the driver’s door is

opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and the Intelligent Key placed in

the Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime

also sounds.

If this indicator appears, remove the Intelligent

Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with

you when leaving the vehicle.

5. NO KEY warning

This warning appears in either of the following

conditions.

No key inside the vehicle :

The warning appears when the door is closed

with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle

and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key :

The warning appears when the ignition switch

is pushed from the LOCK position and the

Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the

system. You cannot start the engine with an

unregistered key. Use the registered Intelligent

Key.

See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section for

more details.

6. SHIFT “P” warning

This warning appears when the ignition switch

is pushed to stop the engine with the selector

lever in any position except the P (Park) posi-

tion.

If this warning appears, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position or push the ignition

switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound. (See

“INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section.)

7. “PUSH” warning

This warning appears when the selector lever is

moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition

switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P”

warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF position,

perform the following procedure:

Instruments and controls 2-23

SHIFT “P” warning →(Move the selector lever

to “P”) →PUSH warning →(Push the ignition

switch →ignition switch position is turned to

ON) →PUSH warning →(Push the ignition

switch →ignition switch position is turned to

OFF)

8. Intelligent Key battery discharge

indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the battery

with a new one. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.)

9. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle speed is

above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is

applied.

10. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel level in the

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches the empty (E) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the

tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (E)

position.

11. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washer tank

fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as

necessary. (See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.)

12. Door/lift gate open warning

(ignition switch is in the ON position)

This warning appears if any of the doors and/or

the lift gate are open or not closed securely. The

vehicle icon indicates which door or the lift gate

is open on the display.

13. “Time to rest” indicator

This indicator appears when the set “time to

rest” indicator activates. You can set the time

for up to 6 hours. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later

in this section.)

14. Loose fuel cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is

not tightened correctly after the vehicle has

been refueled. (See “FUEL-FILLER CAP” in the

“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion.)

15. Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the low tire pres-

sure warning light in the meter illuminates and

low tire pressure is detected. If this warning

appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information

label. (See “Low tire pressure warning light”

earlier in this section and “TIRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.)

16. Low outside temperature warning

This warning appears if the outside temperature

is below 37°F (3°C). The warning can be set not

to be displayed. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in

this section.)

17. Cruise indicator

Cruise main switch indicator :

The indicator is displayed when the cruise

control main switch is pushed. When the main

switch is pushed again, the indicator disap-

pears. When the cruise control main switch

indicator is displayed, the cruise control system

is operational.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Cruise set switch indicator :

The indicator is displayed while the vehicle

speed is controlled by the cruise control sys-

tem. If the indicator blinks while the engine is

running, it may indicate that the cruise control

system is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section for details.

18. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system MAIN switch indicator (if so

equipped)

The indicator is displayed when the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system main switch is

pushed. When the main switch is pushed again,

the indicator disappears. While the main switch

indicator is displayed, the ICC system is opera-

tional. (See “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL

(ICC) SYSTEM (FULL SPEED RANGE)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

19. Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system switch indicator (if so

equipped)

The indicator is displayed when the Distance

Control Assist (DCA) system switch is pushed

on. When the switch is pushed again, the

indicator disappears. While the indicator is

displayed, the DCA system is operational. (See

“DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM” in

the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

SIC3281

Instruments and controls 2-25

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset

the distance for changing the engine oil. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

2. Oil filter replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset

the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

3. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing tires. You can set or reset the

distance for replacing tires. (See “TRIP COM-

PUTER” later in this section.)

4. “OTHER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil

filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance

for replacing the items. (See “TRIP COMPUTER”

later in this section.)

More maintenance reminders are also available

on the center display. (See “HOW TO USE INFO

BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems” section.) SIC4075

2-26 Instruments and controls

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are located on

the right side of the combination meter panel.

To operate the trip computer, push the side or

front of the switches as shown above.

䊊

Aswitch

䊊

Bswitch

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the switch 䊊

Each time the switch 䊊

Ais pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Current fuel consumption →Average fuel con-

sumption and speed →Elapsed time and trip

odometer →Distance to empty (dte) →Outside

air temperature (ICY) →Setting →Warning

check

1. Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption mode shows the

current fuel consumption.

2. Average fuel consumption (MPG or

l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or

km/h)

Fuel consumption :

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the switch

䊊

Bfor longer than 1 second. (The average speed

is also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the

display shows “——”.

Speed :

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is

done by pushing the switch 䊊

Bfor longer

than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is

also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. The

first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

“——”.

3. Elapsed time and trip odometer

(mls or km)

Elapsed time :

The elapsed time mode shows the time since

the last reset. The displayed time can be reset

by pushing the switch 䊊

Bfor longer than

1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the

same time.)

Trip odometer :

The trip odometer mode shows the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven since the last

reset. Resetting is done by pushing the

switch 䊊

Bfor longer than 1 second. (The

elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

SIC3625

Instruments and controls 2-27

4. Distance to empty (dte — mls or

km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of fuel

in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consump-

tion.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is

displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to “——”.

●If the amount of fuel added is small, the

display just before the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position may continue to

be displayed.

●When driving uphill or rounding curves, the

fuel in the tank shifts, which may momen-

tarily change the display.

5. Outside air temperature (ICY — °F

or °C)

The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or

°C in the range of ⫺22 to 131°F (⫺30 to 55°C).

The outside air temperature mode includes a

low temperature warning feature. If the outside

air temperature is below 37°F (3°C), the warning

is displayed on the screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located in

front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected

by road or engine heat, wind directions and

other driving conditions. The display may differ

from the actual outside temperature or the

temperature displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

6. Setting

Setting cannot be made while driving. A mes-

sage “Setting can only be operated when

stopped” is also displayed on the dot matrix

crystal display.

The switch 䊊

Aand switch 䊊

Bare

used in the setting mode to select and decide a

menu.

SKIP :

Push the switch 䊊

Ato move to the

warning check mode.

Push the switch 䊊

Bto select other

menus.

ALERT :

There are 3 submenus under the alert menu.

●BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

●TIME TO REST

Select this submenu to specify when the

“time to rest” indicator activates.

●ICY

Select this submenu to display the low out-

side temperature warning.

MAINTENANCE :

There are 5 submenus under the maintenance

menu.

●BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

●ENGINE OIL

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for changing the engine oil.

●OIL FILTER

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing the oil filter.

2-28 Instruments and controls

●TIRE

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing tires.

●OTHER

Select this submenu and set or reset the

distance for replacing items other than the

engine oil, oil filter and tires.

The maintenance distance will increase by 250

miles (500 km) up to 18,500 miles (30,000 km).

To increase the number by 500 miles (1,000

km), push and hold the button.

DISPLAY :

There are 3 submenus under the display menu.

●BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

●LANGUAGE

Select this submenu to choose English or

French for display.

●UNIT

Select this submenu to choose the unit from

MPG or l/100 km.

7. Warning check

SKIP :

Push the switch 䊊

Ato move to the

warning check mode.

Push the switch 䊊

Bto select other

menus.

DETAIL :

This item is available only when a warning is

displayed.

Select this menu to see the details of warnings.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

●Vehicle security system

●INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audio alarm signals if someone opens the

doors, hood, or lift gate when the system is

armed. It is not, however, a motion detection

type system that activates when a vehicle is

moved or when a vibration occurs.

SIC2133

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-29

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior

or exterior vehicle components in all situations.

Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s)

in the vehicle, and always lock it when unat-

tended. Be aware of your surroundings, and

park in secure, well-lit areas whenever pos-

sible.

Many devices offering additional protection,

such as component locks, identification mark-

ers, and tracking systems, are available at auto

supply stores and specialty shops. Your INFINITI

retailer may also offer such equipment. Check

with your insurance company to see if you may

be eligible for discounts for various theft pro-

tection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the windows

are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve-

hicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and lift gate. Lock

all doors. The doors can be locked with

the Intelligent Key, door handle request

switch, power door lock switch or me-

chanical key.

5. Confirm that the security indicator light

comes on. The security indicator light

stays on for about 30 seconds. The ve-

hicle security system is now pre-armed.

After about 30 seconds the vehicle secu-

rity system automatically shifts into the

armed phase. The security light begins to

flash once every approximately 3 sec-

onds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm

time period, the door is unlocked, or the

ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON,

the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers are in

the vehicle, the system will activate with all

doors, hood, and lift gate locked with the igni-

tion switch in the LOCK position. When pushing

the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the

system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the follow-

ing alarm:

●The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

●The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again.

SIC2045

2-30 Instruments and controls

The alarm is activated by:

●Unlocking the door or opening the lift gate

without using the button on the Intelligent

Key, the door handle request switch or the

mechanical key. (Even if the door is opened

by releasing the door inside lock knob, the

alarm will activate.)

●Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop when a door is unlocked by

pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent

Key, the door handle request switch or using

the mechanical key, or when the ignition switch

is pushed to the ACC or ON position.

If the system does not operate as described

above, have it checked by an INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered Intelligent Key. Never leave these

keys in the vehicle.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC rules for

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT

ASSY - CARD SLOT)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-

tion is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY

APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR

COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHOR-

ITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on the

meter panel. It indicates the status of the

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switch was in

the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function

indicates the security systems equipped on the

vehicle are operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

SIC2045

Instruments and controls 2-31

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control switch can be

operated when the ignition switch is in the ON

position. When the switch is operated, the dot

matrix liquid crystal display switches to the

brightness adjustment mode.

Push the upper switch 䊊

Ato brighten the

instrument panel lights. The bar 䊊

1moves to

the + side. When reaching the maximum bright-

ness, “MAX” appears on the display 䊊

Push the lower switch 䊊

Bto dim the instrument

panel lights. The bar 䊊

1moves to the ⫺side.

When reaching the minimum brightness, “MIN”

appears on the display 䊊

3. However, “MIN”

does not appear during the nighttime.

The dot matrix liquid crystal display returns to

the normal display under the following condi-

tions:

●when the instrument brightness control

switch is not operated for more than 5

seconds.

●when the or switch on the right

side of the combination meter panel is

pushed.

SIC3270

SIC3628

2-38 Instruments and controls

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

䊊

1Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning

direction. When the turn is completed, the turn

signals cancel automatically.

䊊

2Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where lights begin flashing.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the

switch to the position. To turn them off,

turn the switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights to

operate.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers while

moving on the highway unless unusual cir-

cumstances force you to drive so slowly that

your vehicle might become a hazard to other

traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the hazard

warning flasher lights are on.

SIC3271 SIC3272 SIC2574

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-39

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition

switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the

hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could

affect proper operation of the supplemental

front air bag system. Tampering with the

supplemental front air bag system may result

in serious personal injury.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat

heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor

elevated seat temperatures or have an inability

to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat.

Use of the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the seat heater

is operated while the engine is not running.

●Do not use the seat heater for extended pe-

riods or when no one is using the seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which insu-

lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat

cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on the

seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.

This may result in damage to the heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should

be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline,

thinner, or any similar materials.

SIC3629

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

2-40 Instruments and controls

The warning systems switch will turn on and off

the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, the

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system and the For-

ward Collision Warning (FCW) system at the

same time.

The LDW system will sound a warning chime

and blink the lane departure warning light

(orange) to alert the driver if the vehicle is

traveling close to either the left or the right of a

traveling lane with detectable lane markers.

(See “LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP)

SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-

tion.)

The BSW system will illuminate the Blind Spot

Warning (BSW) indicator lights, located next to

the outside mirrors, when the radar sensors

detect a vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn

signal is activated in the direction of the de-

tected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the

BSW indicator light will flash. (See “BLIND SPOT

WARNING (BSW) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.)

The FCW system will sound a warning chime

and the vehicle ahead detection indicator light

blinks to alert the driver if the vehicle is travel-

ing close to the vehicle ahead. (See “FORWARD

COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

The warning systems switch is automatically

turned on when the engine is started, and the

warning systems ON indicator 䊊

1on the switch

illuminates.

To cancel the warning systems, push the warn-

ing systems switch to turn off the system. The

warning systems ON indicator will turn off.

NOTE:

If you continue to push the warning systems

switch from off to on for over 4 seconds, a chime

will sound. This will change the default status of

the LDW, BSW and FCW systems to OFF so that

these systems will not automatically turn on

when the engine is started. If this procedure is

repeated, the default status will return to ON.

SSD1156

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so

equipped)

2-42 Instruments and controls

For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy

roads or slippery areas, turn on the SNOW

mode switch. The indicator light 䊊

1on the

switch will illuminate. When the SNOW mode is

activated, engine output is controlled to avoid

wheel spin.

Turn off the SNOW mode for normal driving.

The vehicle should be driven with the Intelligent

Brake Assist (IBA) system on for most driving

conditions.

The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system will

sound a warning chime to alert the driver when

the vehicle is traveling too close to the vehicle

ahead and will apply the brake control if nec-

essary.

To turn off the system, push the IBA OFF switch.

The indicator will illuminate.

The IBA system will remain in the last ON or OFF

state it was left in until it is manually changed

by pushing the IBA OFF switch.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.

If maximum engine power is needed to free a

stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE

DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

SIC3602 SIC3844 JVS0033X

SNOW MODE SWITCH INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) OFF

SWITCH (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-43

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the

cup holder is being used to prevent spilling

the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you

or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard

objects can injure you in an accident.

To open the cup holder, push the knob 䊊

The flap 䊊

Awill be folded down when inserting

a large container.

To hold a taller container, push the button 䊊

The upper bottom will be folded up.

Front

SIC3632

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-45

The cup holders for rear passengers are located

on the rear center armrest.

To open the cup holder, pull the lid. Make sure

that the lid is closed before storing the rear

center armrest in the seatback.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driv-

ing to prevent an accident.

To open the sunglasses holder, push 䊊

CAUTION

●Do not use for anything other than glasses.

●Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses

holder while parking in direct sunlight. The

heat may damage the glasses.

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help

prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle 䊊

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

To lock 䊊

2/unlock 䊊

3the glove box, use the

mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage,

see “KEYS” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section.

Rear

SIC3633 SIC3246 SIC3866

2-46 Instruments and controls

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, push the button 䊊

To close, push the lid down until latched.

The inner tray (if so equipped) can be posi-

tioned to the front or rear 䊊

2. Make sure that

the arrow mark on the tray points toward the

front and the bosses 䊊

Aare aligned in the slits.

CARD HOLDER

Pull the sun visor down 䊊

1and slide a card in

the card holder 䊊

SEAT-MOUNTED JACKET HANGER (if so

equipped)

The driver’s side head restraint is equipped

with a retractable jacket hanger. Pull the hanger

out as illustrated until it locks. Be sure to return

the hanger after use.

This hanger is designed to be used only for

clothes (maximum load limit: 7.7 lb (3.5 kg)).

To help avoid staining clothes or affecting the

comfort of the passenger behind, do not use the

seat-mounted jacket hanger while the seat be-

hind is occupied by a passenger or a child

restraint.

SIC4687 SIC3663 SSS0831

Instruments and controls 2-47

COAT HOOKS

The coat hooks are equipped beside the rear

personal lights.

CAUTION

Do not place items which are more than 2 lb

(1 kg) on the hook.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

WARNING

●Always make sure that the cargo is properly

secured. Use the suitable ropes and hooks.

●Unsecured cargo can become dangerous in

an accident or sudden stop.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 22 lb

(10 kg) to a single hook.

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo

area hidden from the outside.

To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both

sides on the hooks 䊊

SIC3248 SIC4072 SIC3636

2-48 Instruments and controls

To stow the cargo cover, remove it from the

hooks and hold until it is retracted. Make sure

that the cargo cover is snapped into the holders

䊊

2to keep it from moving around while driving.

To remove the cargo cover, stow the cover and

pull the holder to the opposite side 䊊

WARNING

●Never put anything on the cargo cover, no

matter how small. Any object on it could

cause an injury in an accident or sudden

stop.

●Do not leave the cargo cover in the vehicle

with it disengaged from the holder.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or shift-

ing. Do not place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision, unse-

cured cargo could cause personal injury.

●If the cargo cover contacts the top tether

strap when it is attached to the top tether

anchor, remove the cargo cover from the ve-

hicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its

attachment location. If the cargo cover is not

removed, it may damage the top tether strap

during a collision. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if the

child restraint top tether strap is damaged.

●Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether

strap when it is attached to the top tether

anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does

not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is

not properly secured or cargo that contacts

the top tether strap may damage the top

tether strap during a collision. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion if the child restraint top tether strap is

damaged.

●Do not use the cargo cover if the rear seats

are folded down.

SIC3637 SIC3638

Instruments and controls 2-49

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof

rack. Do not load more than 220 lb (100 kg) on

the roof rails. Observe the maximum load limit

shown on the crossbars or roof carriers when

you attach them on the roof rails. Contact an

INFINITI retailer for crossbar or other equipment

information.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and rear). The

GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S.

or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (located on the

driver’s door pillar). For more information re-

garding GVWR and GAWR, see “VEHICLE LOAD-

ING INFORMATION” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section.

WARNING

●Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is

loaded at or near the cargo carrying capac-

ity, especially if the significant portion of

that load is carried on the roof rack.

●Heavy loading of the roof rack has the poten-

tial to affect the vehicle stability and han-

dling during sudden or unusual handling

maneuvers.

●Roof rack load should be evenly distributed.

●Do not exceed maximum roof rack load

weight capacity.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or shift-

ing. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing items from

the roof rack. If you cannot comfortably lift the

items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a

ladder or stool.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have their

hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in

motion and before closing the windows. Use

the window lock switch to prevent unex-

pected use of the power windows.

●Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls and become trapped in

the window. Unattended children could be-

come involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to

the OFF position. If the driver’s or front passen-

ger’s door is opened during this period of about

45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

SIC3639

WINDOWS

2-50 Instruments and controls

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Rear right passenger side window

5. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push down 䊊

Aor

pull up 䊊

Bthe switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or close

all the windows.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button 䊊

Cis pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, push down or pull up the

switch and hold it.

Automatic operation (for front door

windows)

To fully open or close the window, completely

push down or pull up the switch and release it;

it need not be held. The window will automati-

cally open or close all the way. To stop the

window, just push or lift the switch in the

opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause the

window to open or close until the switch is

released.

SIC3640 SIC3241 SIC3285

Instruments and controls 2-51

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately

before the closed position which cannot be de-

tected. Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before clos-

ing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the window as it is closing, the window will be

immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the window is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition switch is in the ON position or

for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving condi-

tions, the auto reverse function may be activated

if an impact or load similar to something being

caught in the window occurs.

If the windows do not close

automatically

If the power window automatic function (closing

only) does not operate properly, perform the

following procedure to initialize the power win-

dow system.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window completely by operating

the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it

to close the window, and then hold the

switch more than 3 seconds after the

window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Oper-

ate the window by the automatic function

to confirm the initialization is complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other

windows.

If the power window automatic function does

not operate properly after performing the pro-

cedure above, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from the

vehicle through an open moonroof. Always

use seat belts and child restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend

any portion of their body out of the moonroof

opening while the vehicle is in motion or

while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from

the moonroof before opening.

●Do not place any heavy object on the moon-

roof or surrounding area.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The automatic moonroof is operational for

about 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s door

or the passenger’s door is opened during this

period of about 45 seconds, power to the

moonroof is canceled.

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ............................................. 3-2

Intelligent Key ................................. 3-2

Valet hand-off.................................. 3-3

Doors ............................................ 3-4

Locking with mechanical key .................... 3-4

Opening and closing windows with the

mechanical key ................................ 3-4

Locking with inside lock knob ................... 3-5

Locking with power door lock switch............. 3-5

Automatic door locks ........................... 3-5

Child safety rear door lock ...................... 3-6

Intelligent Key system ............................. 3-6

Intelligent Key operating range .................. 3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution .................. 3-9

Intelligent Key operation ........................ 3-9

Battery saver system ...........................3-11

Warning signals................................3-11

Troubleshooting guide ......................... 3-12

Remote keyless entry system...................... 3-13

How to use remote keyless entry system ........ 3-13

Hood............................................ 3-16

Lift gate ......................................... 3-16

Lift gate release lever...........................3-17

Fuel-filler door ....................................3-17

Opening the fuel-filler door .....................3-17

Fuel-filler cap ................................. 3-18

Tilt/telescopic column ............................ 3-19

Manual operation (if so equipped) ..............3-20

Electric operation (if so equipped) ..............3-20

Sun visors .......................................3-20

Mirrors .......................................... 3-21

Inside mirror.................................. 3-21

Outside mirrors ............................... 3-23

Vanity mirror..................................3-24

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .........3-24

Entry/exit function ............................3-24

Seat synchronization function .................. 3-25

Memory storage...............................3-26

System operation ............................. 3-27

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If

you lose your keys, see an INFINITI retailer for

duplicates by using the key number. INFINITI

does not record any key numbers so it is very

important to keep track of your key number

plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, this key can be

duplicated by an INFINITI retailer.

1. Intelligent Key (2 sets)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2

sets)

3. Key number plate (1 set)

INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelli-

gent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s

Intelligent Key system components and INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As

many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. The new keys must

be registered by an INFINITI retailer prior to use

with the Intelligent Key system and INFINITI

Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.

Since the registration process requires erasing

all memory in the Intelligent Key components

when registering new keys, be sure to take all

Intelligent Keys that you have to the INFINITI

retailer.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you

when driving. The Intelligent Key is a preci-

sion device with a built-in transmitter. To

avoid damaging it, please note the

following.

– The Intelligent Key is water resistant;

however, wetting may damage the Intelli-

gent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

– Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-

other object.

– Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in a place where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

– Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

– Do not use a magnet key holder.

– Do not place the Intelligent Key near an

electric appliance such as a television set

or personal computer.

SPA2406

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

– Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come

into contact with water or salt water, and

do not wash it in a washing machine. This

could affect the system function.

●If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that In-

telligent Key. This will prevent the Intelli-

gent Key from unauthorized use to unlock

the vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, please contact an

INFINITI retailer.

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it

into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob

returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

doors and the glove box.

See “DOORS” later in this section, “STORAGE”

in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed in

the Intelligent Key.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give

them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the

mechanical key with you to protect your belong-

ings.

To prevent the glove box from being opened

during valet hand-off, follow the procedures

below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-

telligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical

key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,

keeping the mechanical key in your

pocket or bag for insertion into the Intel-

ligent Key when you retrieve your vehicle.

See “STORAGE” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

SPA2033

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

WARNING

●Always have the doors locked while driving.

Along with the use of seat belts, this pro-

vides greater safety in the event of an acci-

dent by helping to prevent persons from be-

ing thrown from the vehicle. This also helps

keep children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help keep

out intruders.

●Before opening any door, always look for and

avoid oncoming traffic.

●Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious accidents.

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors simultaneously using the

mechanical key.

●Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the

front of the vehicle 䊊

1will lock all doors.

●Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once

to the rear of the vehicle 䊊

2will unlock the

driver’s door. After returning the key to the

neutral position 䊊

3, turning it to the rear

again within 60 seconds will unlock all

doors.

●You can switch the lock system to the mode

that allows you to open all the doors when

the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE

SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, cli-

mate, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section.)

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also allows you

to open and close the window that is equipped

with the automatic open/close function. (See

“POWER WINDOWS” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.)

To open the window, turn the driver’s door key

cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer than

1 second . The door is unlocked and the window

keeps opening while turning the key.

This function can also be performed by pushing

and holding the door UNLOCK button of the

Intelligent Key. (See “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM” later in this section.)

To close the window, turn the driver’s door key

cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second . The door is locked and the

window keeps closing while turning the key.

SPA2457B

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position 䊊

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position 䊊

Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the

vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will lock

or unlock all the doors. The switches are lo-

cated on the driver’s and front passenger’s door

armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the lock position 䊊

Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler

door, push the power door lock switch to the

unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver or front

passenger) is moved to the lock position with

the Intelligent Key in the port and any door

open, all doors will lock and unlock automati-

cally. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle

(not in the Intelligent Key port) and any door

open, all doors will unlock automatically and a

chime will sound after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

●All doors will be locked automatically when

the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

●All doors will be unlocked automatically

when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

The automatic unlock function can be deacti-

vated or activated. To deactivate or activate the

automatic door unlock system, perform the

following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

SPA1814 SPA2300

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,

push and hold the power door lock switch

to the position (UNLOCK) for more

than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will

flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard

indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between each

setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is

deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To

unlock the door manually, use the inside lock

knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or

front passenger’s side).

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety rear door locks help prevent doors

from being opened accidentally, especially

when small children are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position 䊊

1, the

rear doors can be opened only from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the unlock

position 䊊

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect electric

medical equipment. Those who use a pace-

maker should contact the electric medical

equipment manufacturer for the possible in-

fluences before use.

●The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves

when the buttons are pushed. The FAA ad-

vises that the radio waves may affect aircraft

navigation and communication systems. Do

not operate the Intelligent Key while on an

airplane. Make sure that the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the unit is

stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote controller function

or pushing the request switch on the vehicle

without taking the key out from a pocket or

purse. The operating environment and/or con-

ditions may affect the Intelligent Key system

operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you

when operating the vehicle.

SPA2535

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle

when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating

with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The

Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio

waves. Environmental conditions may interfere

with the operation of the Intelligent Key system

under the following operating conditions.

●When operating near a location where strong

radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV

tower, power station and broadcasting sta-

tion.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,

and CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depend-

ing on the operating conditions, the battery’s

life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is

discharged, replace it with a new one.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-

ing radio waves, if the key is left near equip-

ment which transmits strong radio waves, such

as signals from a TV and personal computer, the

battery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-

tery, see “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACE-

MENT” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

For models with a steering wheel lock mecha-

nism: Because the steering wheel is locked

electrically, unlocking the steering wheel with

the ignition switch in the LOCK position is

impossible when the vehicle battery is com-

pletely discharged. Pay special attention that

the vehicle battery is not completely dis-

charged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. For information

about the purchase and use of additional Intel-

ligent Keys, contact an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which con-

tains electrical components, to come into

contact with water or salt water. This could

affect the system function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If

the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately

wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-

tended period in an area where tempera-

tures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field, such as

a TV, audio equipment and personal

computers.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to oper-

ate the vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, contact an INFINITI retailer.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch 䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged

or strong radio waves are present near the

operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s

operating range becomes narrower, and the

Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone who does not

carry the Intelligent Key to push the request

switch to lock/unlock the doors.

SPA2074

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intel-

ligent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

key with you and then lock the doors.

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

●The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing

doors with the door handle request switch)

can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHICLE

INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section.)

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out from your pocket or bag.

SPA2326 SPA2408

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met for 60

minutes, the battery saver system will cut off

the power supply to prevent battery discharge.

●The ignition switch is in the ACC position,

and

●All doors are closed, and

●The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelli-

gent Key listed on the following chart or to help

prevent the vehicle from being stolen, chime or

beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and

a warning displays in the dot matrix liquid

crystal display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

displays, be sure to check the vehicle and

Intelligent Key.

See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in this

section and “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS-

PLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch to

stop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously.

The selector lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

Shift the selector lever to the P

(Park) position.

When opening the driver’s door to

get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

The Intelligent Key is in the Intelli-

gent Key port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the

Intelligent Key port.

When closing the door after getting

out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the

display, the outside chime sounds 3

times and the inside warning chime

sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the

display and the outside chime

sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or

OFF position and the selector lever is

not in the P (Park) position.

Move the selector lever to the P

(Park) position and push the ignition

switch to the OFF position.

When closing the door with the in-

side lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for ap-

proximately 3 seconds and all the

doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re-

quest switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for ap-

proximately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch is

pushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch

after the door is closed.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when

the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises that

the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation

and communication systems. Do not operate

the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make

sure that the buttons are not operated uninten-

tionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel-filler

door, activate the panic alarm and open the

windows by pushing the buttons on the Intelli-

gent Key from outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the Intelli-

gent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key

can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft

(10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance

depends upon the conditions around the ve-

hicle.)

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with

one vehicle. For information concerning the

purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys,

contact an INFINITI retailer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent

Key will not operate when:

●the distance between the Intelligent Key and

the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).

●the Intelligent Key battery runs down.

After locking with the remote keyless entry

function, pull the door handle to make sure the

doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies de-

pending on the environment. To securely oper-

ate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the

vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM

When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift

gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the

horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a

confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard

indicator and horn mode” later in this section.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors and the lift gate.*2

3. Push the LOCK button

䊊

on the

Intelligent Key.

SPA2252

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

4. All the doors, the lift gate and fuel-filler

door will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key

while any door is open.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the UNLOCK button

䊊

on the

Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door and fuel-filler door will un-

lock.

3. Push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key again within 60 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again.

All the doors and the lift gate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless

one of the following operations is performed

within 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key while the

doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time

period, the UNLOCK button on the Intel-

ligent Key is pushed, all doors will be locked

automatically after another 1 minute.

●Opening any door

●Pushing the ignition switch

Opening windows

The UNLOCK button operation also al-

lows you to open a window that is equipped

with the automatic open/close function. (See

“POWER WINDOWS” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.)

To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key for about 3

seconds after the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button.

Window cannot be closed using the Intelligent

Key.

The door window can be opened or closed by

turning the mechanical key in a door lock. (See

“DOORS” earlier in this section.)

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention as

follows:

1. Push the PANIC button

䊊

on the

Intelligent key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights

will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

●It has run for 25 seconds, or

●Any of the buttons on the Intelligent key

are pushed. (Note: Panic button should be

pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button 䊊

1is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps

once. When the UNLOCK button 䊊

2is

pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button

is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

䊊

located below the instrument panel; the

hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever

䊊

up at the front of the

hood with your fingertips and raise the

hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the

hood down to latch both the right and left

locks. Push the hood down to lock the

hood securely into place.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely closed and

latched before driving. Failure to do so could

cause the hood to fly open and result in an

accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from the

engine compartment, to avoid injury do not

open the hood.

WARNING

●Always be sure the lift gate has been closed

securely to prevent it from opening while

driving.

●Do not drive with the lift gate open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be

drawn into the vehicle. See “PRECAUTIONS

WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section for exhaust

gas.

SPA2452

HOOD LIFT GATE

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

●The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors including the lift

gate simultaneously.

●Push the opener switch 䊊

Aand pull the

opener handle to open the lift gate.

LIFT GATE RELEASE LEVER

If the lift gate cannot be opened with the door

lock switch due to a discharged battery, follow

these steps.

1. Remove the cover

䊊

inside of the lift gate

using a suitable tool.

2. Move the lever

䊊

as illustrated to open

the lift gate using a suitable tool.

Contact an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible

for repair.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-filler

door by using one of the following operations,

then push the left side of the door.

●Push the door handle request switch with

the Intelligent Key carried with you.

●Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent

Key.

●Insert the mechanical key into the door lock

cylinder and turn it to the rear of the vehicle.

●Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and

lock all doors by operating the door handle

SPA2453 SPA2454 SPA1562A

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

request switch, the LOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key, the mechanical key or the power door

lock switch.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly

explosive under certain conditions. You

could be burned or seriously injured if it is

misused or mishandled. Always stop engine

and do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after

the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automati-

cally. Continued refueling may cause fuel

overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possi-

bly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type fuel-

filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in

safety valve needed for proper operation of

the fuel system and emission control sys-

tem. An incorrect cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It could

also cause the malfunction indicator light to

come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to at-

tempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in the

vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause

an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or

gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the

risk of serious injury or death when filling

portable fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the ground

when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the

container while you are filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel contain-

ers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it

away with water to avoid paint damage.

●Insert the cap straight into the fuel-filler

tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap

clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the malfunction

indicator light (MIL) to illuminate. If the

light illuminates because the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or in-

stall the cap and continue to drive the ve-

hicle. The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by an INFINITI retailer.

●The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning (if so

equipped) will appear if the fuel-filler cap is

not properly tightened. Failure to tighten the

fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL

CAP warning (if so equipped) appears may

cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

to illuminate.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to re-

move. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊

while refueling.

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on the

vehicle information display when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle

has been refueled. To turn off the warning,

perform the following steps:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

soon as possible. (See “FUEL-FILLER

DOOR” earlier in this section.)

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Push the switch

䊊

for about 1

second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP

tightening the fuel-filler cap.

WARNING

●Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

●Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer

to you than is necessary for proper steering

operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag

inflates with great force. If you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting sideways

or out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the air bag if you are up against it when

it inflates. Always sit back against the seat-

back and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

JVP0006X SPA2839

TILT/TELESCOPIC COLUMN

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

MANUAL OPERATION (if so equipped)

Tilt or telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1down and adjust the

steering wheel up, down, forward or rearward to

the desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

ELECTRIC OPERATION (if so equipped)

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up

or down, forward or rearward to the desired

position.

Entry/Exit function operation (if so equipped) :

The automatic drive positioner system will

make the steering wheel move up automatically

when the driver’s door is opened with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position. This lets

the driver get into and out of the seat more

easily.

For more information, see “AUTOMATIC DRIVE

POSITIONER” later in this section.

SPA2468 SPA2456

SPA2471

SUN VISORS

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. To block glare from the front, swing down

the main sun visor

䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove the

main sun visor from the center mount and

swing the visor to the side

䊊

3. Slide the sun visor

䊊

in or out as needed.

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside

mirror to the desired position.

Manual anti-glare type

The night position 䊊

1will reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in day-

light hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when necessary,

because it reduces rearview clarity.

SPA2447 SPA2143

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

Automatic anti-glare type

The inside mirror is designed so that it auto-

matically changes reflection according to the

intensity of the headlights of the following

vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automatically

turned on when the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position.

When the anti-glare system is turned on, the

indicator light 䊊

Awill illuminate and excessive

glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind

you will be reduced.

Type A: Push the switch 䊊

Bto make the

inside rearview mirror operate normally and the

indicator light will turn off. Push the

switch again to turn the system on.

Type B: Push the “䡩” switch 䊊

Cto make the

inside rearview mirror operate normally. The

indicator light will turn off. Push the “I” switch

䊊

Dto turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the sensors 䊊

or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so will

reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in

improper operation.

For the compass (if so equipped) operation, see

“COMPASS” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.

For the HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver opera-

tion, see “HomeLink姞UNIVERSAL TRANS-

CEIVER” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

Type A

SPA2422A

Type B

SPA2450

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the

passenger side are closer than they appear. Be

careful when moving to the right. Using only

this mirror could cause an accident. Use the

inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to

properly judge distances to other objects.

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located on

the armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Turn the switch right or left to select the right or

left side mirror 䊊

1, then adjust using the con-

trol switch 䊊

Defrosting outside mirrors

The outside mirrors will be heated when the

rear window defroster switch is operated.

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

When backing up the vehicle, the right or left

outside mirror will turn downward automatically

to provide better rear visibility.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Move the selector lever to the R (Reverse)

position.

3. Choose the right or left outside mirror by

operating the outside mirror control

switch.

SPA2319 SPA1829

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

4. The selected outside mirror surface

moves downward.

When one of the following conditions has oc-

curred, the selected outside mirror surface will

return to its original position.

●The selector lever is moved to any position

other than R (Reverse).

●The outside mirror control switch is set to

the center position.

●The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun

visor and pull up the cover.

The automatic drive positioner system has three

features:

●Entry/exit function

●Seat synchronization function

●Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

and steering column will automatically move

when the automatic transmission selector lever

is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver

to get into and out of the driver’s seat more

easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the

steering wheel will move up when the driver’s

door is opened with the ignition switch in the

OFF position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return

to the previous positions when one of the

following is operated:

●When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ACC position after the driver’s door is

closed.

●When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position.

●When the Intelligent Key is inserted into the

port after the driver’s door is closed.

SIC3869

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so

equipped)

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The driver’s seat will not return to the previous

positions if the seat or steering adjusting

switch is operated when the seat is at the exit

position.

Cancel or activate entry/exit function

The selector lever must be in the P (Park)

position with the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The entry/exit function can be activated or

canceled by pressing and holding the SET

switch for more than 10 seconds.

The indicator lights on the memory switches (1

and 2) will blink once when the function is

canceled, and the indicator lights will blink

twice when the function is activated.

The entry/exit function can also be activated or

canceled if the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key

or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key is turned

to ON or OFF in the “Comfort & Conv.” settings.

(See “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in

the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section.)

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the entry/exit function will not work

though this function was set on before. In such

a case, after connecting the battery or replacing

with a new fuse, open and close the driver’s

door more than two times after the ignition

switch is turned from the ON position to the

LOCK position. The entry/exit function will be

activated.

SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION

The seat synchronization function automatically

adjusts the positions of the steering wheel and

outside mirrors when the seat is adjusted using

the power seat switches.

However, the steering wheel and outside mir-

rors will not move if the seat is adjusted over

the maximum thresholds. The system considers

that the steering wheel and outside mirror

adjustments are not necessary because the

seat may not be adjusted for the driving posi-

tion. Note that the function is set to disabled as

the factory default setting.

SPA2469

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

The seat synchronization function operates un-

der the following conditions:

●The ignition switch is in the ON position.

●The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

If the outside mirrors or the steering wheel

reaches its maximum adjustment, the function

is automatically disabled. Restart the function

by selecting a previously stored seat memory

position using the memory switches (1 or 2). An

Intelligent Key that was previously linked to the

stored seat memory can also be used to restart

the function.

If a seat position was not previously stored in

the seat memory, restart the function by adjust-

ing the steering wheel and outside mirrors

manually for your best driving position and then

drive the vehicle above 4 MPH (7 km/h).

Cancel or activate seat

synchronization function

The selector lever must be in the P (Park)

position with the ignition switch in the ACC

position.

The seat synchronization function can be acti-

vated or canceled by pushing and holding the

SET switch for more than 10 seconds while the

ignition switch is in the ACC position.

The indicator lights on the memory switches

(1 and 2) will blink once when the function is

canceled, and the indicator lights will blink

twice when the function is activated.

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering

column and outside mirrors can be stored in the

automatic drive positioner memory. Follow

these procedures to use the memory system.

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column

and outside mirrors to the desired posi-

tions by manually operating each adjust-

ing switch. For additional information, see

“SEATS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section and “TILT/TELESCOPIC COLUMN”

page 3-19 and “OUTSIDE MIRRORS” ear-

lier in this section.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-

onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)

fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will stay on for approximately 5 sec-

onds after pushing the switch.

If memory is stored in the same memory

switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking Intelligent Key to a stored

memory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored

memory position with the following procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory

position.

2. While the indicator light for the memory

switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-

onds, push the UNLOCK button on

the Intelligent Key. If the indicator light

blinks, the Intelligent Key is linked to that

memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position,

and then push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat, steering wheel

and outside mirrors will move to the memorized

position or to the exit position when the

entry/exit function is set to active.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Confirming memory storage

●Push the ignition switch to the ON position

and push the SET switch. If the main memory

has not been stored, the indicator light will

come on for approximately 0.5 second.

When the memory has stored in position, the

indicator light will stay on for approximately

5 seconds.

●If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In

this case, reset the desired position using

the previous procedure.

●If optional Intelligent Keys are added to your

vehicle, the memory storage procedure to

switch 1 or 2 and linking Intelligent Key

procedure to a stored memory position

should be performed again for each Intelli-

gent Key. For additional Intelligent Key infor-

mation, see “KEYS” earlier in this section.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Use one of the following methods to move

the driver’s seat, the outside mirrors and

the steering wheel.

●Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion and push the memory switch (1 or 2)

fully for at least 1 second.

●Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s

door, push the memory switch (1 or 2)

fully for at least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, steering column and

outside mirrors will move to the memo-

rized position or to the exit position when

the entry/exit function is set to active with

the indicator light flashing, and then the

light will stay on for approximately 5

seconds.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

●When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH

(7 km/h).

●When the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat and steering column is turned on while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

●When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not

pushed for at least 1 second.

●When the seat, steering column and outside

mirrors have already been moved to the

memorized position.

●When no position is stored in the memory

switch.

●When the engine is started while moving the

automatic drive positioner.

●When the AT selector lever is moved from the

P (Park) position to any other position. (How-

ever, it will not be canceled if the switch is

pushed while the seat and steering column

are returning to the previous positions

(entry/exit function).)

●When the driver’s door remains open for

more than 45 seconds and the ignition

switch is not in the ON position.

●The seat synchronization function is auto-

matically disabled if the outside mirrors or

steering wheel reaches its maximum adjust-

ment.

●The seat synchronization function will not

operate if the seat is adjusted over one of

the following maximum thresholds:

– Seat sliding: 3.0 in (76 mm)

– Seatback reclining: 9.1 degrees

– Seat lifter (rear side): 0.8 in (20 mm)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Safety note ....................................... 4-2

Center multi-function control panel ................. 4-2

How to use INFINITI controller ................... 4-5

How to use touch screen (models with

navigation system) ............................. 4-5

Menu options (models with navigation

system) ....................................... 4-7

How to select menus on the screen ..............4-8

Vehicle information and settings....................4-8

How to use STATUS button...................... 4-8

How to use brightness control and display

ON/OFF button .................................4-8

How to use INFO button ........................4-8

How to use SETTING button .................... 4-12

Rearview monitor.................................4-22

How to read displayed lines....................4-22

How to park with predicted course lines.........4-23

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-24

How to adjust screen ..........................4-26

Operating tips ................................ 4-27

Around view monitor (if so equipped) .............. 4-27

How to switch the display......................4-29

How to see each view .........................4-30

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-34

Camera aiding corner sonar function ............4-36

How to adjust the screen view.................. 4-37

Around view monitor settings .................. 4-37

Operating tips ................................4-38

Ventilators.......................................4-38

Automatic climate control .........................4-39

Automatic climate control (Type A) ..............4-40

Automatic climate control (Type B) ..............4-43

Operating tips ................................4-46

In-cabin microfilter ............................4-47

Servicing climate control....................... 4-47

Audio system ....................................4-48

Audio operation precautions ...................4-48

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player ........................................4-62

DVD (DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC) player

operation (models with navigation system) ......4-66

Usb memory operation.........................4-70

Bluetooth姞streaming audio (models with

navigation system) ............................4-74

iPod姞player operation.........................4-79

Music box姞(if so equipped).................... 4-81

Cd/dvd/usb memory care and cleaning .........4-88

Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio ......4-90

Antenna ...................................... 4-91

Car phone or CB radio ............................4-92

Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System (models

with navigation system)...........................4-93

Regulatory information.........................4-94

Voice commands ..............................4-94

Control buttons ...............................4-95

Connecting procedure ......................... 4-95

Phone selection ...............................4-96

Vehicle phonebook ............................4-96

Making a call .................................4-98

Receiving a call ...............................4-99

During a call .................................4-100

Phone setting ................................ 4-101

Troubleshooting guide ........................ 4-102

Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System (models

without navigation system) (if so equipped) ....... 4-103

Regulatory information........................4-104

Control buttons ..............................4-104

Voice recognition system .....................4-104

Pairing procedure ............................4-109

Phonebook registration ....................... 4-110

Making a call ................................ 4-110

Receiving a call ...............................4-111

During a call ..................................4-111

Phone settings ................................4-112

Voice adaptation mode ........................4-115

INFINITI Voice Recognition system (models with

navigation system) .............................. 4-116

INFINITI Voice Recognition standard mode ...... 4-116

Using the system..............................4-119

INFINITI Voice Recognition alternate

command mode .............................. 4-129

Using the system............................. 4-135

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-140

WARNING

●Do not disassemble or modify this system. If

you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or

electric shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack

of sound. Continued use of the system may

result in accident, fire or electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in the

system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice

smoke or smell coming from it, stop using

the system immediately and contact your

nearest INFINITI retailer. Ignoring such con-

ditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric

shock.

Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme

temperature conditions [below ⫺4°F (⫺20°C)

and above 158°F (70°C)]. Operating this system

under these conditions may result in system

malfunctions.

1. “CAMERA ” Around View Monitor display

button (P. 4-103)

2, 6, 7, 10, 11.

For navigation system control buttons (Re-

fer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.)

3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-5)

4. “STATUS ” status display button (P. 4-8)

5. “ OFF ” brightness control and dis-

play ON/OFF button (P. 4-8)

8. “AM·FM·SAT ” band selector button

(P. 4-48)

9. “DISC·AUX ” selector button (P. 4-48)

12. “INFO ” vehicle and navigation informa-

tion button (P. 4-8)

13. “SETTING ” button (P. 4-12)

With navigation system

SAA1836

SAFETY NOTE CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. “AUX ” button (P. 4-27)

2. “RADIO AM·FM ” band selector button

(P. 4-48)

3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-5)

4. “ OFF ” brightness control and dis-

play ON/OFF button (P. 4-8)

5. “INFO ” vehicle information button

(P. 4-8)

6. “DISC ” selector button (P. 4-48)

7. “STATUS ” status display button (P. 4-8)

8. “SETTING ” button (P. 4-12)

Without navigation system (Type A)

SAA1524

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

1. “DISC·AUX ” selector button (P. 4-48)

2. “CAMERA ” Around View Monitor display

(P. 4-27)

3. INFINITI controller (P. 4-5)

4. “ OFF ” brightness control and dis-

play ON/OFF button (P. 4-8)

5. “INFO ” vehicle information button

(P. 4-8)

6. “RADIO AM·FM ” band selector button

(P. 4-48)

7. “STATUS ” status display button (P. 4-8)

8. “SETTING ” button (P. 4-12)

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not run-

ning (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will

use up all the battery power, and the engine will

not start.

Without navigation system (Type B)

SAA2103 With navigation system

SAA1541

Without navigation system

SAA1508

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display using the main

directional buttons 䊊

2(or additional directional

buttons 䊊

6with navigation system) or center

dial 䊊

3, and push the ENTER button 䊊

1for

operation.

If you push the BACK button 䊊

4before the

setup is completed, the setup will be canceled

and/or the display will return to the previous

screen. This button can also be used to delete

characters that have been input.

After the setup is completed, push the BACK

button 䊊

4and return to the previous screen.

For the VOICE button 䊊

5functions, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models

with navigation system)

CAUTION

●The glass screen on the liquid crystal display

may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp

object. If the glass screen breaks, do not

touch it. Doing so could result in an injury.

●To clean the display, use a soft, dry cloth. If

additional cleaning is necessary, use a small

amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, ben-

zine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They

will scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water or car

fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid

will cause the system to malfunction.

To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot

be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

WARNING

●ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.

●Avoid using vehicle features that could dis-

tract you. If distracted, you could lose con-

trol of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as those

for the INFINITI controller are possible using the

touch screen operation.

Selecting the item :

Touch an item to select it. To select the “Audio”

settings, touch the “Audio” area 䊊

1on the

screen.

Touch the BACK 䊊

2button to return to the

previous screen.

SAA2473

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Adjusting an item :

Touch the +䊊

1or ⫺䊊

2button to adjust the

settings.

Touch the 䊊

3or 䊊

4button to

move to the previous or next item.

Touch the 䊊

5or 䊊

6button to

move to the previous or next page.

Inputting characters :

Touch the letter or number 䊊

There are some options available when input-

ting characters.

●Uppercase:

Shows uppercase characters.

●Lowercase:

Shows lowercase characters.

●Symbols:

Shows symbols such as the question mark

(?).

●Space:

Inserts a space.

●Delete:

Deletes the last character that has been

input with one touch. Push and hold the

button to delete all of the characters.

●OK:

Completes character inputs.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or

detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then

wipe the screen.

SAA2474 SAA2475

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MENU OPTIONS (models with

navigation system)

The start menu can be displayed using the

menu control switch on the steering-wheel-

mounted controls.

1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is dis-

played, push and hold the menu control

switch until the “Menu Options” screen

appears.

2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the

menu control switch up or down, and then

push the menu control switch to select it.

Available items

Destination/Route :

These items are for the navigation system. See

the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual for details.

Info :

Displays the information screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the INFO

button.

Settings :

Displays the settings screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the SET-

TING button.

SAA1525 SAA2476

With navigation system

SAA2477

Without navigation system

SAA1510

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the display

screen in menus. To select each key item,

highlight the preferred item using the INFINITI

controller and push the ENTER button.

Whenever a menu selection is made or menu

item is highlighted, different areas on the

screen provide you with important information.

See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current

screen.

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that

menu screen.

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the INFINITI controller may be

used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and

select more options.

4. Menu Items Counter:

Shows the total number of items listed

across all pages for the current menu.

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently high-

lighted.

HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, air condi-

tioner system, fuel consumption and navigation

system (if so equipped), push the STATUS but-

ton. The following information will appear when

the STATUS button is pushed repeatedly.

Audio and Air conditioner system →Audio and

fuel economy →Audio and Navigation system

(if so equipped)

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CONTROL

AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

Push the “ OFF” button to switch the

display brightness to the daytime mode or the

nighttime mode, and to adjust the display

brightness using the INFINITI controller while

the indicator is displayed at the bottom of the

screen.

The display brightness can also be adjusted

using the brightness UP button (+) or bright-

ness DOWN button (⫺).

Push and hold the “ OFF” button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the

button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON

The display screen shows vehicle and naviga-

tion (if so equipped) information for your con-

venience.

The information shown on the screen should be

a guide to determine the condition of the ve-

hicle. See the following for details.

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.

2. Select an item from the INFO menu.

3. After viewing or adjusting the information

on the following screens, push the BACK

button to return to the INFO menu.

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual for the following items:

●Where am I?

●Traffic Info

●Weather Info

●Map Update

●Navigation Version

With navigation system

SAA2478

Without navigation system

SAA1511

SAA2479

With navigation system

SAA2480

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

Fuel Economy information

The distance to empty, average fuel economy

and current fuel economy will be displayed for

reference.

To reset the average fuel economy (Avg Fuel

Econ), select the “Reset Fuel Eco” or “Reset”

key.

If the “Fuel Eco History” or “View” key is

selected, the average fuel consumption history

will be displayed in graph form along with the

average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON”

later in this section.)

The fuel economy information may differ from

the information displayed on the vehicle infor-

mation display. This is due to the timing differ-

ence in updating the information and does not

indicate a malfunction.

SAA2720

Without navigation system

SAA2721

SAA2481

With navigation system

SAA2482

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Maintenance information

The maintenance intervals can be displayed for

the engine oil, oil filter, tire and other remind-

ers.

To set a maintenance interval, select a preferred

item from the list.

You can also set to display a message to remind

you that the maintenance needs to be per-

formed.

The following example shows how to set the

engine oil maintenance information. Use the

same steps to set the other maintenance infor-

mation.

1. Set the interval (mileage) of the mainte-

nance schedule. To determine the recom-

mended maintenance interval, refer to

your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance

Guide”.

2. To display the reminder automatically

when the desired distance is reached,

select the “Reminder” key.

3. Reset the driving distance to the new

maintenance schedule.

4. To return to the previous screen, push the

BACK button.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON”

later in this section.)

The Reminder will be automatically displayed

when the specified distance has been driven

and every time the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position. The reminder will not

appear while driving.

Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder for the

rest of the current drive.

To stop the reminder from appearing, perform

one of the following actions:

●Select the “Reset Distance”.

●Deactivate the “Reminder”.

●Increase the “Interval” distance to be more

than the current distance being tracked.

SAA1554

Without navigation system

SAA2722

Example

SAA3003

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Others information (models with

navigation system)

The Others information display will appear

when pushing the INFO button and selecting the

“Others” key.

GPS Position :

For the details of this item, see the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Voice Recognition :

For the details of this item, see “INFINITI VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation

system)” later in this section.

HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON

The display as illustrated will appear when the

SETTING button is pushed.

For navigation settings, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

For details of the “Driver Assistance” settings,

see “LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP) SYS-

TEM” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

SAA2483

With navigation system

SAA2484

Without navigation system

SAA2604

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio settings

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Audio” key.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade :

To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound

balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance”

or “Fade” key and adjust it with the INFINITI

controller.

These items can also be adjusted by pushing

and turning the AUDIO knob.

BOSE姞AudioPilot姞(if so equipped) :

When this item is turned to ON, AudioPilot姞

monitors noise in the passenger compartment

with a microphone and compensates for any

unpleasant noise.

Surround Vol. (if so equipped) :

To adjust the surround sound volume, select

“Surround Vol.” and adjust it with the INFINITI

controller.

Speed Sensitive Vol. :

The audio system’s volume is increased with

the vehicle speed. Select the “Speed Sensitive

Vol.” and adjust the effect level with the INFINITI

controller. The Speed Sensitive Volume function

is turned off when the level is set to OFF.

Increasing the value will cause the volume to

increase faster with vehicle speed.

Driver’s Audio Stage (if so equipped) :

When this feature is turned to ON, better sound

will be provided to the driver’s position. The

driver can enjoy a more crisp and clear sound

that is specialized for the driver’s position. The

effect of this feature depends on the type of

music that is played. For some music, it may be

difficult to realize the effect of this feature.

DivX姞Registration Code (models with naviga-

tion system) :

The registration code for a device that is used to

download DivX姞files will be displayed on the

screen. If a disc is loaded or a USB memory is

connected to the audio system, this function

will not be activated.

Display Album Cover Art (models with naviga-

tion system) :

When this item is turned to ON, the album cover

image is displayed when playing compressed

music files through a CD, DVD or USB device.

When the image is not properly embedded in

the file or device, the image will not be dis-

played.

With navigation system

SAA2485

Without navigation system

SAA2740

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Phone settings (models with

navigation system)

For details of the “Phone” settings, see

“BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)” later in this

section.

Bluetooth姞settings (for models with

navigation system)

For details of the “Bluetooth” settings, see

“BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)” later in this

section. Volume and Beeps settings (models

with navigation system)

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Vol-

ume & Beeps” key.

Audio Volume :

To increase or decrease the audio volume,

select the “Audio Volume” and adjust it with the

INFINITI controller. You can also adjust the

audio volume by turning the VOLUME control

knob.

Guidance Volume :

To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or

softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and ad-

just it with the INFINITI controller.

You can also adjust the guidance voice volume

by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice

guidance is being announced.

Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call :

For the details of these items, see

“BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)” later in this

section.

Switch Beeps :

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a

beep sound when you use a button.

Guidance Voice :

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear

voice guidance in the navigation operation or in

other operations.

NOTE:

When the voice guidance is being announced

during audio playback, turning the volume knob

does not adjust the music level; it adjusts the

guidance volume level. If voice guidance is not

being heard, please check the Guidance Volume

level.

SAA2554

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the selector lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows

view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in

detecting large stationary objects to help avoid

damaging the vehicle. The system will not de-

tect small objects below the bumper and may

not detect objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

WARNING

●The rearview camera is a convenience but it

is not a substitute for proper backing up.

Always turn and check that it is safe to do so

before backing up. Always back up slowly.

●Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor dif-

fer from actual distance because a wide-

angle lens is used. Objects in the RearView

Monitor will appear visually opposite like

ones viewed in the inside and outside

mirrors.

●Make sure that the back door is securely

closed when backing up.

●Underneath the bumper and the corner areas

of the bumper cannot be viewed on the rear-

view monitor because of its monitoring

range limitation.

●Do not put anything on the rearview camera.

The rearview camera is installed above the

license plate.

●When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water may

enter the camera unit causing water conden-

sation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an

electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a precision

instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction

or cause damage resulting in a fire or an

electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do not

scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow

from the cover.

HOW TO READ DISPLAYED LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

bumper line 䊊

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

●Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

SAA1896

REARVIEW MONITOR

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

(1 m) to the place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1 m)

distance on the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that

any object on the hill is further than it appears

on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown further than the actual

distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft

(1 m) to the place 䊊

A, but the actual 3 ft (1 m)

distance on the hill is the place 䊊

B. Note that

any object on the hill is closer than it appears

on the monitor.

SAA1979

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

You can individually set the driver and front

passenger side temperature using each tem-

perature control button.

1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON

button/Temperature control dial (driver

side)

2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

3. “ ” fan speed increase button

4. “ ” front defroster button

5. “MODE” manual air flow control button

6. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF

button/Temperature control dial (passen-

ger side)

7. “OFF” button for climate control system

8. “ ” fan speed decrease button

9. “ ” rear window defroster button

(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR-

ROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. In-

struments and controls” section.)

10. “ ” intake air control button

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(Type A)

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) :

This mode may be used all year round. The

system works automatically to control the in-

Type A

SAA1527

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

side temperature, air flow distribution and fan

speed after the preferred temperature is set

manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator

on the button will illuminate and AUTO will

be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver

side) to set the desired temperature.

●The temperature can be set within the

following range.

– For U.S.: 60 to 90°F

– For Canada: 18 to 32°C

●The temperature of the passenger com-

partment will be maintained automati-

cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed

will also be controlled automatically.

3. You can individually set driver and front

passenger side temperature using each

temperature control button. When the

“DUAL” button is pushed or the passen-

ger side temperature control button is

turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.

To turn off the passenger side tempera-

ture control, push the “DUAL” button.

4. To turn off the climate control system,

push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Heating (A/C OFF) :

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. When you need to heat only, use this

mode.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on.

2. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator

will turn off.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-

tem may not work properly.

●Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Push the “ ” front defroster button.

(The indicator light on the button will

come on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, push the fan speed increase but-

ton “ ” and set it to the maximum

position.

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to

the auto mode.

●When the “ ” front defroster button is

pushed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on at outside temperatures

above 23°F (⫺5°C) to defog the windshield,

and the air recirculate mode will automati-

cally be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging per-

formance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control :

Push the fan speed increase “ ”orde-

crease “ ” buttons to manually control the

fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

1. “AUTO” automatic operation

button/Temperature control dial (driver

side)*

2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button*

3. “ ” fan speed increase button

4. “ ” front defroster button

5. “MODE” manual air flow control button*

6. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF

button/Temperature control dial (passen-

ger side)*

7. “OFF” button for climate control system*

8. “ ” fan speed decrease button

9. “ ” rear window defogger button

(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIR-

ROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2. In-

struments and controls” section.)

10. “ ” auto-recirculation

button/intake air control button

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(Type B)

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the

system automatically controls constant tem-

perature, air flow distribution and fan speed

after the desired temperature is set manually.

To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push

the “OFF” button.

Cooling and dehumidified heating:

1. Push the “AUTO” button.

(The AUTO indicator light will illuminate

and “AUTO” will appear on the display.)

2. If the A/C indicator light does not illumi-

nate, push the “A/C” button.

(The A/C indicator light will illuminate.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial (driver’s

side) to set the desired temperature.

●The temperature can be set within the

following range.

– For U.S.: 60 to 90°F

– For Canada: 18 to 32°C

●When the DUAL indicator light is turned

off:

– Pushing the driver’s side “AUTO” but-

ton changes both the driver’s and

front passenger’s side temperature.

– Pushing the passenger’s side “DUAL”

button changes only the front passen-

ger’s side temperature. (The DUAL in-

dicator light will illuminate and

“DUAL” will appear on the display.)

Type B

SAA3568

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

●To set separate desired temperatures for

the driver and front passenger, push the

“DUAL” button, the indicator light illumi-

nates, and then turn the corresponding

temperature control dial.

●To cancel the separate temperature set-

ting, push the “DUAL” button, the indica-

tor light turns off, and the driver’s side

temperature setting will be applied to

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

sides.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Heating (A/C off):

1. Push the “AUTO” button.

(The AUTO indicator light will illuminate

and “AUTO” will appear on the display.)

2. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, push

the “A/C” button.

(The A/C indicator light will turn off.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

●When the DUAL indicator light is turned

off:

– Pushing the driver’s side “AUTO” but-

ton changes both the driver’s and

front passenger’s side temperature.

– Pushing the passenger’s side “DUAL”

button changes only the front passen-

ger’s side temperature. (The DUAL in-

dicator light will illuminate and

“DUAL” will appear on the display.)

●To set separate desired temperatures for

the driver and front passenger, push the

“DUAL” button, the indicator light illumi-

nates, and then turn the corresponding

temperature control dial.

●To cancel the separate temperature set-

ting, push the “DUAL” button, the indica-

tor light turns off, and the driver’s side

temperature setting will be applied to

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

sides.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Doing so may

cause the temperature not to be con-

trolled properly.

●If the windows fog up, use dehumidified

heating instead of the A/C off heating.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

1. Push the “ ” button. (The indicator

light will illuminate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

●To remove frost from the outside surface of

the windshield quickly, set the temperature

control and fan speed control to their maxi-

mum position.

●After the windshield is cleared, push the

“AUTO” button to set to the automatic mode.

●When the “ ” button is pushed, the air

conditioner will automatically turn on when

the outside air temperature is above 23°F

(⫺5°C) to defog the windshield. The air

recirculation mode will automatically turn

off. The outside air circulation mode will be

selected to improve the defogging perfor-

mance.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The sunload sensor 䊊

Aon the instrument panel

helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not

put anything on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

Type A:

The climate control system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner

heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace

the filter in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in the INFINITI Service and Mainte-

nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact an

INFINITI retailer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow is ex-

tremely decreased or when windows fog up eas-

ily when operating heater or air conditioning

system.

Type B:

The climate control system is equipped with a

natural grape seed polyphenol filter which col-

lects and neutralizes dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To

make sure that the air conditioner heats, defogs

and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in

accordance with the specified maintenance in-

tervals listed in the separate maintenance

booklet. To replace the filter, contact an INFINITI

retailer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow de-

creases significantly or if windows fog up easily

when operating the heater or air conditioner.

SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL

The climate control system in your INFINITI is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind. This refrigerant will not

harm the earth’s ozone layer. However, special

charging equipment and lubricant are required

when servicing your INFINITI air conditioner.

Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will

cause severe damage to your climate control

system. (See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for climate con-

trol system refrigerant and lubricant recommen-

dations.)

Your INFINITI retailer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly climate control sys-

tem.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under high

pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air con-

ditioner service should be done only by an ex-

perienced technician with the proper

equipment.

SAA1983

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and push the radio band select button

to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio

with the engine not running, the ignition switch

should be pushed to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external

influences. Intermittent changes in reception

quality normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may

influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception :

Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the

quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle,

even when the finest equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

function in your INFINITI radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change

because of vehicle movement. Buildings, ter-

rain, signal distance and interference from

other vehicles can work against ideal reception.

Described below are some of the factors that

can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

FM radio reception :

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the

FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related to

the distance between the transmitter and re-

ceiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path,

exhibiting many of the same characteristics as

light. For example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to

fade and/or drift.

SAA0306

AUDIO SYSTEM

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Static and flutter: During signal interference

from buildings, large hills or due to antenna

position, usually in conjunction with increased

distance from the station transmitter, static or

flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by

lowering the treble setting to reduce the treble

response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other, result-

ing in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception :

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmit-

ter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

Satellite radio reception :

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a

malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with

the satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of

any metal or large building for the satellite

radio to receive all of the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM姞

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio

is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

The satellite radio performance may be affected

if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Compact Disc (CD) player

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or

CD changer/player.

SAA0480

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed

could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to the humidity. If this

occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or

ventilate the player completely.

●The player may skip while driving on rough

roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round

discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL

AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

●CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,

covered with fingerprints, or that have pin

holes may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work properly:

– Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they may

cause the CD player to malfunction.

– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

– CDs that are not round

– CDs with a paper label

– CDs that are warped, scratched, or have

abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play prerecorded

CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn

CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

– Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly

(the label side is facing up, etc.).

– Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped

and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the temperature inside

the player is too high. Remove the CD by

pushing the EJECT button, and after a short

time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played

when the temperature of the player returns to

normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio system

(only MP3 or WMA CD).

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player

(models with navigation system)

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD/DVD

insert slot. This could damage the CD/DVD

player.

LHA0484

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Dolby digital is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

●Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

●DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ” are

registered trademarks of Digital Theater Sys-

tems, Inc.

Parental level (parental control) :

DVDs with the parental control setting can be

played with this system. Please use your own

judgement to set the parental control with the

system.

Disc selection :

The following disc formats can be played with

the DVD drive.

●DVD-VIDEO

●VIDEO-CD

●CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc)

●DTS-CD

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

This system supports various USB memory

sticks, USB hard drives and iPod姞players.

There are some USB devices which may not be

supported with this system.

●Make sure that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB connector.

●Do not force the memory stick or USB cable

into the USB connector. This could damage

the connector.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to humidity. If this

occurs, remove the USB device and dehu-

midify or ventilate the USB player com-

pletely.

●The USB player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

●Do not leave USB memory in a place prone to

static electricity or where the air conditioner

blows directly. The data in the USB memory

may be damaged.

●The vehicle is not equipped with a USB

memory stick.

●A USB device cannot be formatted with this

system. To format a USB device, use a

personal computer.

●Partitioned USB devices may not be played

correctly.

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on the vehicle center screen. Using

English language characters with a USB de-

vice is recommended.

●Do not connect a USB device if a connector

or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or

connectors to dry completely before con-

necting the USB device. If the connector is

exposed to fluids other than water, evapora-

tive residue may cause a short between the

connector pins.

●Large video podcast files cause slow re-

sponses in an iPod姞. The vehicle center

display may momentarily black out, but it

will soon recover.

●If an iPod姞automatically selects large video

podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momentarily

black out, but it will soon recover.

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod姞.

●An iPod姞nano (1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod姞.

●An iPod姞nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPod姞

nano (2nd Generation)

iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compressed Audio Files

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

Explanation of terms :

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size

of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track can reduce the file size by

approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1

kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. The compression

reduces certain parts of sound that seem

inaudible to most people.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is

a lossy audio compression format. Audio

files that have been encoded with AAC are

generally smaller in size and deliver a higher

quality of sound than MP3.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part

of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that con-

tains information about the digital music file

such as song title, artist, album title, encod-

ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag

information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows姞and Windows Media姞are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America

and/or other countries.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Playback order :

●The folder names of folders not containing

compressed audio files are not shown in the

display.

●If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software, so

the files might not play in the desired order.

●Music playback order of compressed audio

files is as illustrated in the next figure.

SAA2494

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM (models with navigation system), DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, USB2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM (models with navigation system), DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL: ISO9660

LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not

supported.UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0

* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

Sampling fre-

quency

8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling fre-

quency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR (Ver.9)*4

AAC*5 Version MPEG-AAC

Sampling fre-

quency

8 kHz - 96 kHz

Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

1. AM·FM·SAT band select button

2. DISC·AUX button

1. RADIO AM·FM band select button

2. DISC/DISC·AUX button

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO OP-

ERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio

is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio.

After receiving the activation signal, an avail-

able channel list will be automatically updated

in the radio. For XM, push the ignition switch

from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit :

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control :

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push the ON·OFF button

while the system is off to turn on the last audio

source (i.e. FM or CD), which was playing im-

With navigation system

SAA1533

Without navigation system (Type A)

SAA1504

Without navigation system (Type B)

SAA2101A

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

mediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF

button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance :

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push

the Audio control knob. When the display

shows the setting you want to change (Bass,

Treble, Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio

control knob to set the desired setting. For the

other setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SET-

TING BUTTON” earlier in this section.

This vehicle has some sound effect functions as

follows:

●Speed Sensitive Vol.

For more details, see “HOW TO USE SETTING

BUTTON” earlier in this section.

Switching the display :

Pushing the DISC·AUX or DISC button will

switch the displays as follows:

iPod姞/USB →CD/DVD →Music Box姞→

Bluetooth姞Audio →iPod姞/USB

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

or radio (FM/AM/SAT) band

select :

Pushing the RADIO AM·FM or FM·AM radio band

select button will change the band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →XM1 →XM2 →XM3 →AM

When the RADIO AM·FM or AM·FM SAT radio

band select button is pushed while the ignition

switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio

will come on at the channel last played.

The last channel played will also come on when

the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.

The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the

RADIO AM·FM or AM·FM SAT radio band select

button is turned to ON, the audio source will

automatically be turned off and the last radio

channel played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning) :

●For AM and FM radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual tuning.

●For XM Satellite Radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek channels

from all of the categories when any category

is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CATEGORY

(CAT) :

●For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button

or to tune from low to high or high to

low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

●For XM Satellite Radio

Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button

or to tune to the first channel of the

next or previous category.

During satellite radio reception, the following

notices will be displayed under certain condi-

tions.

●NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the

SAT tuner is connected.)

●OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

●CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection error)

●LOADING (When the initial setting is per-

formed)

●UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-

scription is not active)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

/ Next/Previous

Chapter:

Select the “ ”or“ ” key to skip the

chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward. The

chapters will advance/go back the number of

times this key is selected.

/ Commercial Skip:

This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR.

Select the “ ”or“ ” key to skip

forward or backwards by the set amount as

defined in the DVD Settings menu.

Top Menu :

When the “Top Menu” key is selected in the

screen while a DVD is being played, the top

menu specific to each disc will be displayed. For

details, see the instructions on the disc.

DVD settings

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following

settings.

Key (DVD-VIDEO) :

Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed.

: Move the cursor to select a DVD

menu.

Enter: Enter the selected menu.

Move: Change the display location by moving

the operation key.

Back: Return to the previous screen.

Hide: Hide the operation key.

Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO) :

Some menus specific to each disc will be

shown. For details, see the instructions on the

disc.

Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR) :

The scene with the specified title will be dis-

played each time the “+” side or “⫺” side is

selected.

Group Search (VIDEO CD) :

A scene in the specified group will be displayed

each time the “+” side or “⫺” side is selected.

10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, CD-DA,

DVD-VR) :

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the

number entry screen. Input the number to be

searched and select the “OK” key. The specified

Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

Select No. (VIDEO-CD) :

Select the “Select No.” key to open the number

entry screen. Input the number to be searched

and select the “OK” key. The specified scene

will be played.

Example

SAA2498

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB MEMORY OPERATION

Audio main operation

Open the console lid and connect a USB

memory 䊊

1as illustrated. Then, push the

DISC·AUX or DISC button repeatedly to switch to

the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL

control knob will start the USB memory.

File selection (models with navigation

system)

When there are both audio and movie files in

the USB memory, the mode select screen is

displayed. Select the preferred contents to play.

When there is only one type of file, the audio or

movie operation screen is displayed and starts

to play.

If a video file restricts the number of playbacks,

a pop-up screen will appear to confirm it is ok to

play. Answer yes or no as requested by the

display.

SAA3471 SAA2500

With navigation system

SAA2501

Without navigation system

SAA2611

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio file operation

or PLAY :

When the DISC·AUX or DISC button is pushed

with the system off and the USB memory in-

serted, the system will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USB

memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX or DISC

button repeatedly until the center display

changes to the USB memory mode.

Next/Previous File and Fast

Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while a USB memory is

being played, the USB memory will play while

forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the USB memory will return to normal

play speed.

When the or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is

being played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the USB memory will be

played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when the USB memory is being

played.

Folder selection :

To change to another folder in the USB memory,

turn the folder selector or choose a folder

displayed on the screen using the INFINITI

controller.

REPEAT (RPT),

RANDOM (RDM) :

When the RPT button is pushed while the USB

memory is played, the play pattern can be

change as follows.

To change the play mode, push the RPT button

repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.

Normal →1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →

All Random →1 Folder Random →Normal

Text (models without navigation system) :

When the “Text” key is selected on the screen

using the INFINITI controller and then the ENTER

button is pushed while a USB memory is being

played, the music information listed below will

be displayed on the screen.

●Folder title

●File title

●Song title

●Album Title

●Artist

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

●10 Key Search

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the

number entry screen.

Input the number to be searched and select

the “OK” key.

The specified folder/file will be played.

●Display

To adjust the image quality of the screen,

select the preferred adjustment items.

●DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-

matically adjusts the soundtrack volume

level to maintain a more even sound to the

speakers.

●Audio

Select the preferred language for audio.

●Subtitle

Select the preferred language for subtitle.

●Display Mode

Select the “Normal”, “Wide”, “Cinema” or

“Full” mode.

BLUETOOTH姞STREAMING AUDIO

(models with navigation system)

Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth姞

Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible

Bluetooth姞device with streaming audio (A2DP

profile), you can set up the wireless connection

between your Bluetooth姞device and the in-

vehicle audio system. This connection allows

you to listen to the audio from the Bluetooth姞

device using your vehicle speakers. It also may

allow basic control of the device for playing and

skipping audio files using the AVRCP Bluetooth

profile. All Bluetooth姞Devices do not have the

same level of controls for AVRCP. Please consult

the manual for your Bluetooth姞Device for more

details.

Once your Bluetooth姞device is connected to

the in-vehicle audio system, it will automati-

cally reconnect whenever the device is present

in the vehicle and you select Bluetooth Audio

from your audio system. You do not need to

manually reconnect for each usage.

Regulatory information

FCC Regulatory information :

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s

RF exposure guidelines, use only the sup-

plied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modi-

fication, or attachments could damage the

transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) This device may not cause interference

and

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice

IC Regulatory information :

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) This device may not cause interference,

and

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Bluetooth姞trademark:

Bluetooth姞is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc.

Connecting procedure

1. Push the SETTING button and select the

“Bluetooth” key.

2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

SAA2505 SAA2506

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

3. A confirmation screen will be displayed.

Select “No”.

Note: Selecting “Yes” will only connect the

hands free phone portion of a Bluetooth姞

device.

4. Choose a PIN code to use with the com-

patible Bluetooth姞audio device using the

number input screen. The PIN code will

need to be entered into the Bluetooth姞

audio device after step 5. Select the “OK”

key.

5. The standby message screen will appear.

Operate the compatible Bluetooth姞audio

device. For the connecting procedure of

the audio device, see the Bluetooth姞au-

dio instructions.

When the connecting is completed, the

screen will return to the Bluetooth姞setup

display.

SAA2507 SAA3005 SAA3006

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Play Mode :

The play mode setting display will appear when

the “Menu” key is selected.

Choose the preferred play mode from the fol-

lowing items.

●Shuffle

Choose “Shuffle OFF”, “Shuffle All Tracks”

and “Shuffle Group”.

●Repeat

Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1 Track”,

“Repeat All Tracks” and “Repeat Group”.

Bluetooth姞settings

To set up the Bluetooth姞device system to the

preferred settings, push the SETTING button

and select the “Bluetooth” key.

Bluetooth姞:

If this setting is turned off, the connection

between the Bluetooth姞devices and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth姞module will be canceled.

Connect Bluetooth :

Connects to the Bluetooth姞device. See “Con-

necting procedure” earlier in this section. Up to

5 devices can be registered.

Connected Devices :

Registered devices are shown on the list. Select

a Bluetooth姞device from the list, the following

options will be available.

●Select

Select “Select” to connect the selected de-

vice to the vehicle. If there is a different

device currently connected, the selected de-

vice will replace the current device.

●Edit

Rename the selected Bluetooth姞device us-

ing the keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with

navigation system)” earlier in this section.)

●Delete

Delete the selected Bluetooth姞device.

Edit Bluetooth姞Info :

Change the name broadcasted by this system

over Bluetooth姞. Change the PIN code that is

entered when connecting a hands free device to

this system.

SAA2511

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●First generation iPod touch姞(firmware ver-

sion 2.1)

●Second generation iPod touch姞(firmware

version 2.1.1)

●First generation iPod nano姞(firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1)

●Second generation iPod nano姞(firmware

version 1.1.3)

●Third generation iPod nano姞(firmware ver-

sion 1.1 PC)

●Third generation iPhone姞(firmware version

2.1)

Make sure that the iPod姞version is updated.

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the DISC·AUX or DISC

button repeatedly to switch to the iPod姞mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

iPod姞was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button

will start the iPod姞.

or PLAY :

When the DISC·AUX or DISC button is pushed

with the system off and the iPod姞connected,

the system will turn on. If another audio source

is playing and the iPod姞is connected, push the

DISC·AUX or DISC button repeatedly until the

center display changes to the iPod姞mode.

Interface :

The interface for iPod姞operation shown on the

vehicle center display is similar to the iPod姞

interface. Use the INFINITI controller and the

ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod姞with

your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the

menu list screen. For further information about

each item, see the iPod姞Owner’s Manual.

●Now Playing

●Playlists

●Artists

●Albums

●Songs

●Podcasts

●Genres

●Composers

●Audiobooks

●Shuffle Songs

The following touch-panel buttons shown on

the screen are also available:

●: returns to the previous screen.

●: plays/pauses the music selected.

Next/Previous Track and

Fast Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod姞is play-

ing, the iPod姞will play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the

iPod姞will return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod姞is play-

ing, the next track or the beginning of the

current track on the iPod姞will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when the iPod姞is playing.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM) :

When the RPT button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

MUSIC BOX姞(if so equipped)

The “Music Box姞” can store songs from CDs

being played. 40.0 GB (9.3 GB for music storage

capacity) (with navigation system) or a 2.0 GB

(800 MB for music storage capacity) (without

navigation system).

The following CDs can be recorded in the “Mu-

sic Box姞” audio system.

●CDs that contain uncompressed audio files

●Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid

CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs

●Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) specifi-

cation in CD-Extras

●First session of multisession disc

Extreme temperature conditions [below ⫺4°F

(⫺20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect the

performance of the hard-disk/flash memory.

NOTE:

If the hard drive/flash memory needs to be re-

placed due to a malfunction, all stored music

data will be erased.

With navigation system

SAA2513

Without navigation system

SAA2612

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

Recording CDs

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For

the details of playing CDs, see “Compact

Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in this

section.

2. Select the “Start REC” or “REC” key.

NOTE:

●The system starts playing and recording the

1st track on the CD when the “Start REC” or

“REC” key is selected.

●The recording process can be stopped at any

time. All tracks that were played before the

CD was stopped are stored.

●Individual tracks can be deleted from the

hard drive/flash memory after the CD is re-

corded.

If the title information of the track being re-

corded is stored either in the hard drive/flash

memory or in the CD, the title is automatically

displayed on the screen. For title acquisition

from the hard drive/flash memory, music rec-

ognition technology and related data are pro-

vided by Gracenote姞.

If a track is not recorded successfully due to

skipping sounds, the mark is displayed

behind the track number.

The “Music Box姞” hard drive/flash memory

cannot perform recording under the following

conditions.

●There is not enough space in the hard-disk

●The number of albums reaches the maximum

of 500.

●The number of tracks reaches the maximum

of 3,000.

Automatic recording :

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned

to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted.

(See “Music Box姞settings” later in this sec-

tion.)

Stopping recording :

To stop the recording, select the “Stop REC” key

button by touching the screen or using the

INFINITI controller.

With navigation system

SAA2514

Without navigation system

SAA2613

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned

off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position, the recording also stops.

Playing recorded songs

Select the “Music Box姞” audio system by using

one of the following methods.

●Push the audio source switch on the steering

wheel repeatedly until the center display

changes to the Music Box姞mode. (See

“STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CONTROLS

FOR AUDIO” later in this section.)

●Push the DISC·AUX or DISC button repeat-

edly until the center display changes to the

Music Box姞mode.

●Give voice commands. (See “INFINITI VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with naviga-

tion system)” later in this section.)

Stopping playback :

The system stops playing when:

a. another mode (radio, CD, DVD, USB memory

or iPod) is selected.

b. the audio system is turned off.

c. the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK

position.

With navigation system

SAA2515

Without navigation system

SAA2614

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

Next/Previous Track and

Fast Forward/Rewind :

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while a track is being

played, the track will play while fast forwarding

or rewinding. When the button is released, the

track will return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while a track is being

played, the next track or the beginning of the

current track will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when a track is being played.

Play mode selection :

The TUNE/FOLDER knob will skip from album to

album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the

Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,

the knob will change the track instead of the

album. The upper right corner of the main

screen will indicate if the TUNE knob is chang-

ing by track or album.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM) :

When the RPT·RDM button is pushed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

(Normal) →1 Album Repeat →1 Track Repeat →

1 Album Random →All Random →(Normal)

Tag Track (models with navigation system) :

Select “Tag Track” key on the screen when a

track is being played. A menu will show the 5

available playlists. Select one of the playlists to

add the current song to that playlist. If a playlist

is not selectable (text is grayed out), it means

the song already exists in that playlist. With navigation system

SAA2516

Without navigation system

SAA2725

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

There are some options available by selecting

the “Menu” key on the screen during playback.

Select one of the following options that are

displayed on the screen if necessary.

Now Playing (models with navigation system) :

Displays a track list to choose a preferred track

for playback.

Music Library :

There are some options available during play-

back. Select one of the following options that

are displayed on the screen if necessary.

●Artists

Play tracks by an artist whose music is

currently being played. The artists are sorted

in alphabetical order.

●Albums

Play tracks in each album. The albums are

sorted in alphabetical order.

●All Songs

Play tracks from all recorded tracks. The

tracks are sorted in alphabetical order.

●Genres

Play tracks by a selected genre.

My Playlists (models with navigation system) :

Displays the Playlist and edits the Playlist if

necessary.

Select the “Edit” key.

The following items are available

●Add Current Songs

Add a current track to the Playlist.

●Add Songs by Album

Displays a list of albums in alphabetical

order. Selecting an album displays all of the

tracks in the album. Select tracks from the

list to add to the Playlist.

●Add Songs by Artist

Displays a list of artists in alphabetical

order. Selecting an artist displays all of the

tracks by the artist. Select tracks from the

list to add to the Playlist.

●Edit Songs Order

Reorder the tracks in the Playlist by select-

ing a track and specifying the order.

●Edit Name

Edit the name of the Playlist using the

keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW

TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER” earlier in this

section.)

●Delete Songs

Delete tracks in the Playlist by selecting from

the displayed song list.

Play Mode (models with navigation system) :

Choose the preferred play mode from the fol-

lowing items.

●Normal

●1 Album Repeat

●1 Track Repeat

●1 Playlist Random

●1 Artist Random

●1 Album Random

●1 All Track Random

●1 All Random

Edit Music Information :

Displays the following information about the

Music Box姞hard drive/flash memory to edit if

necessary.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

●Edit Information of Current Song (models

with navigation system)

Edit the “Track”, “Artist” and “Genre” infor-

mation of the current track using the keypad

displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO USE

TOUCH SCREEN (models with navigation sys-

tem)” earlier in this section.)

Edit the “Mode” information by selecting

from the list.

●Edit Information by Album (models with navi-

gation system)

Edit the displayed name and of a selected

album and the track information in the al-

bum.

●Update Gracenote from USB Device (models

with navigation system)/Transfer Titles from

USB (models without navigation system)

Update the in-vehicle Gracenote Database

using a USB memory. Search the title from a

information acquired on the Internet.

Visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/music-update/

for details.

●Transfer Missing Titles to USB

Transfer the information of an album re-

corded without titles to a USB memory.

Visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/music-update/

for details.

●Update Gracenote from HDD (models with

navigation system)/Update Missing Titles

(models without navigation system)

The title information is acquired from the

database stored in the hard drive/flash

memory.

With navigation system

SAA2517

Without navigation system

SAA2438

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Music Box姞settings

To set the Music box姞hard drive/flash memory

to your preferred settings, select the “Menu ”

key during playback, and the “Music Box Set-

tings ” key with the INFINITI controller, and then

push the ENTER button.

Music Box Used/Free Space :

Information about “Saved Album”, “Saved

Track” and “Remaining Time” is displayed.

Automatic Recording :

When this item is turned to ON, the Music Box姞

hard drive/flash memory automatically starts

recording when a CD is inserted.

Delete Songs from Music Box :

Deletes the current song, selected songs or

albums by choosing from the list, or all

songs/albums in the Music Box姞.

Recording Quality :

Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132

kbps. The default is set to 105 kbps.

CDDB Version (models with navigation

system)/Gracenote Database Version (models

without navigation system) :

The version of the built-in Gracenote Database

is displayed.

Gracenote

NOTE:

●The information contained in the Gracenote

Database is not fully guaranteed.

●The service of the Gracenote Database on

the Internet may be stopped without prior

notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF

THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote姞MusicID姞Terms of Use

This application or device contains software

from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California

(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote

(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this appli-

cation to perform disc and/or file identification

and obtain music-related information, including

name, artist, track, and title information

(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or em-

bedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote

Servers”) and to perform other functions. You

may use Gracenote Data only by means of the

intended End-User functions of this application

or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers for your own personal non-commercial

use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer

or transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE

NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERV-

ERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use

the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you

violate these restrictions. If your license termi-

nates, you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all

rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and the Gracenote Servers, including all

ownership rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment to

you for any information that you provide.

You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its

rights under this Agreement against you di-

rectly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier

to track queries for statistical purposes. The

purpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden-

tifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count

queries without knowing anything about who

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

you are. For more information, see the web

page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the

Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or warran-

ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy

of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete

data from the Gracenote Servers or to change

data categories for any cause that Gracenote

deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are

error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-

ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninter-

rupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide

you with new enhanced or additional data types

or categories that Gracenote may provide in the

future and is free to discontinue its services at

any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EX-

PRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-

ITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-

ABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE

DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE

SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO

CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR

FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote姞. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more

information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,

This product and service may practice one or

more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;

#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,

#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,

#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-

ing. Some services supplied under license from

Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks

of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,

and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-

marks of Gracenote.

CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND

CLEANING

CD/DVD

●Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never touch

the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

SAA0451

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the album

(folder) number (if playing compressed au-

dio files).

●Pushing the menu control switch will show

the Music Box姞Menu.

Bluetooth姞Audio (models with navigation sys-

tem) :

●Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the track

number.

BACK switch

Push this switch to go back to the previous

screen or cancel the selection if it is not com-

pleted.

Volume control switches

Push the upper (+) or lower (⫺) side switch to

increase or decrease the volume.

Audio source switch

Push the audio source switch to change the

mode as follows.

●Models with navigation system

AM →FM →SAT →CD/DVD →Music Box姞

→USB/iPod姞→Bluetooth姞Audio

●Models without navigation system

AM →FM →CD →Music Box姞→USB/iPod姞

→SAT

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

window.

CAUTION

●Do not place metalized film near the rear

window glass or attach any metal parts to it.

This may cause poor reception or noise.

●When cleaning the inside of the rear window,

be careful not to scratch or damage the rear

window antenna. Lightly wipe along the an-

tenna with a dampened soft cloth.

Roof antenna

Removing the antenna :

You can remove the antenna if necessary.

Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by

turning counterclockwise.

CAUTION

●To avoid damaging or deforming the an-

tenna, be sure to remove the antenna under

the following conditions.

– The vehicle enters an automatic car wash.

– The vehicle enters a garage with a low

ceiling.

SAA2102

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

– The vehicle is covered with a car cover.

●Always properly tighten the antenna rod dur-

ing installation. Otherwise, the antenna rod

may break during vehicle operation.

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in

your INFINITI, be sure to observe the following

cautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the electronic control modules

and electronic control system harness.

WARNING

●A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions pro-

hibit the use of cellular telephones while

driving.

●If you must make a call while your vehicle is

in motion, the hands-free cellular phone op-

erational mode (if so equipped) is highly rec-

ommended. Exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

●If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires

you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle before doing

so.

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as possible

from the electronic control modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm)

away from the electronic control system har-

ness. Do not route the antenna wire next to

any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as

recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB radio

chassis to the body.

●For details, consult an INFINITI retailer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONTROL BUTTONS

1) TALK button

2) PHONE SEND button

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

1. Push the button, and select the

“Connect Phone” key.

2. When a PIN code appears on the screen,

operate the compatible Bluetooth姞cellu-

lar phone to enter the PIN code.

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for the details. You can also visit

www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth or call

INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department for

instructions on pairing INFINITI recom-

mended cellular phones.

When the connection process is completed,

the screen will return to the Phone menu

display.

SAA2219 SAA2519 SAA2520

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a

name to speak when using the INFINITI

Voice Recognition system.

6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to

speak the name after the tone.

7. When the voicetag is successfully saved,

select the “OK” key to save the phone-

book entry.

8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will

show a screen that is ready to call the

number. Press the BACK button to return

to the Vehicle Phonebook.

There are different methods to input a phone

number. Select one of the following options

instead of “Enter Number by Keypad” in step 3.

–Copy from Call History

The system will show a list of incoming,

outgoing or missed calls that were down-

loaded from the connected cellular phone

(depending on the phone’s compatibility).

Select one of these entries to save in the

vehicle phonebook.

–Copy from the Handset

The system will show the connected cellular

phone’s phonebook that was downloaded

(depending on the phone’s compatibility).

Select one of these entries to save in the

vehicle phonebook. Editing the Vehicle Phonebook

1. Push the button and select the

“Vehicle Phonebook” key.

2. Select the desired entry from the dis-

played list.

3. Select the “Edit” key.

4. Select the desired item to change.

SAA2523 SAA2620

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

5. Select the “Call” key to start dialing the

number.

There are different methods to make a call.

Select one of the following options instead of

“Handset Phonebook” in step 2 above.

●Vehicle Phonebook

Select an entry stored in the Vehicle’s

Phonebook.

●Call History

Select an outgoing, incoming or missed call

downloaded from your cell phone (depend-

ing on your phone’s compatibility).

●Dial Number

Input the phone number manually using the

keypad displayed on the screen. (See “HOW

TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with naviga-

tion system)” earlier in this section.)

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display will

change to the incoming call mode. To receive a

call, perform one of the following procedures

listed below.

a) Select the “Answer” key.

b) Push the button on the steering

wheel.

There are some options available when receiv-

ing a call. Select one of the following displayed

on the screen.

●Answer

Accept an incoming call to talk.

SAA2621 SAA2525

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

●Hold Call

Put an incoming call on hold.

●Reject Call

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, perform one of the follow-

ing procedures listed below.

a) Select the “Hang up” key.

b) Push the button on the steering

wheel.

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.

Select one of the following displayed on the

screen if necessary.

●Hang up

Finish the call.

●Use Handset

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

●Mute

Mute your voice to the person.

●Keypad

Using the touch tone, send digits to the

connected party for using services such as

voicemail.

●Cancel Mute

This will appear after “Mute” is selected.

Mute will be canceled.

●Switch Call*

Select “Switch call” to switch caller. By

selecting ⬙Hang up⬙, you can end a call and

can speak to a caller who is on hold again.

* This function may not be usable, depend-

ing on the model of the phone.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or

quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or ⫺)

on the steering wheel or turn the volume control

knob on the instrument panel while talking on

the phone. This adjustment is also available in

the SETTING mode.

SAA3587

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PHONE SETTING

To set up the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone

System to your preferred settings, push the

SETTING button on the instrument panel and

select the “PHONE” key.

Edit Vehicle Phonebook

To edit the vehicle phonebook, use the same

procedure as described in “VEHICLE PHONE-

BOOK” earlier in this section.

Delete Phonebook

The vehicle phonebook entries can be deleted

all at the same time or one by one.

Download Handset Phonebook

Download the contacts registered in a

Bluetooth姞cellular phone. Availability of this

function depends on each cellular phone. The

memory downloading procedure from the cellu-

lar phone also varies according to each cellular

phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for

details.

Volume

The following kinds of phone volume can be set.

●Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call

To increase or decrease the volume, select

the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call” or “Outgo-

ing Call” key and adjust it with the INFINITI

controller.

●Automatic Hold

When this function is activated, an incoming

phone call is automatically held.

●Vehicle Ringtone

When this function is activated, a specific

ringtone that is different from the cellular

phone will sound when receiving a call.

Auto Download

When this item is activated, the phonebook of a

hands-free phone is automatically downloaded

at the same time that the hands-free phone is

connected.

SAA2527

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the com-

mand correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)”

later in this section; page 4-116.)

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the

vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is

too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the

wrong voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “VEHICLE PHONEBOOK” earlier in

this section.)

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a

safe location. If you have to use a phone

while driving, exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

●If you find yourself unable to devote full at-

tention to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe location

and stop your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a

phone after starting the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth姞

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phone, you can

set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone mod-

ule. With Bluetooth姞wireless technology, you

can make or receive a telephone call with your

cellular phone in your pocket.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-

vehicle phone module, no phone connecting

procedure is required. Your phone is automati-

cally connected with the in-vehicle phone mod-

ule when the ignition switch is pushed to the

“ON” position with the registered cellular

phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth姞

cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular

phone at a time.

When a call is active, the audio system and

microphone (located in the ceiling in front of the

rearview mirror) are used for the handsfree

communications.

If the audio system is being used at the time,

the audio mode will mute and will stay muted

until the active call is ended.

The INFINITI Voice Recognition system supports

the phone commands, so dialing a phone num-

ber using your voice is possible.

Before using the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the Bluetooth姞Hands-

Free Phone System.

●Some Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking ga-

rage, behind a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked in order not

to be dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

●Immediately after the ignition switch is

pushed to the “ON” position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short period

of time.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth姞wireless connection, the bat-

tery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual.

BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(models without navigation system) (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

PHONE SETTINGS

Call

●(a name)

If there are entries stored in the Phone Book,

a number associated with a name and loca-

tion can be dialed. See “Phone book regis-

tration” in this section to learn how to store

entries. When prompted by the system, say

the name of the phone book entry to call.

The system acknowledges the name. If there

are multiple locations associated with the

name, the system asks the user to choose

the location.

Once the name and location are confirmed,

the system begins the call.

●Number

When prompted by the system, speak the

number to call.

●Redial

Use the Redial command to call the last

number of outgoing calls. The system ac-

knowledges the command, repeats the num-

ber and begins dialing. If a redial number

does not exist, the system announces,

“There is no number to redial” and ends the

VR session.

●Callback

Use the Callback command to call the last

number in incoming calls. The system ac-

knowledges the command, repeats the num-

ber and begins dialing. If an incoming call

number does not exist, the system an-

nounces, “There is no number to call back”

and ends the VR session.

●Help

The system announces the available com-

mands.

Phonebook

●(a name)

Use the name command to seek the name

and locations registered in the phonebook in

alphabetical order. When the system ac-

knowledges the alphabet the user spoke,

the system announces all registered names

and locations beginning with that alphabet.

Playback of the list can be stopped at any

time by pressing a button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

●List Names

Use the List Names command to hear the

names and locations registered in the

phonebook. When the system acknowledges

SAA2582 SAA2583

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

the command, the system announces all

voicetags registered in the system.

Playback of the list can be stopped at any

time by pressing a button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

●Transfer Entry

Use the Transfer Entry command to transfer

the phonebook data stored in a cellular

phone to the system.

The system acknowledges the command and

asks the user to initiate a transfer from the

phone handset. The new contact phone

number will be transferred from the cellular

phone via a Bluetooth姞communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to

each cellular phone. See the cellular phone

Owner’s Manual for more information. The

system repeats the number and prompts the

user for the next command. After entering

numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number. The system then asks if the user

would like to store another location for the

same name. If the user does not wish to

store another location, the system ends the

VR session.

●Delete Entry

Use the Delete Entry command to delete a

specific number or all numbers in the phone-

book. The system announces the names of

the phone numbers already stored in the

system. The system then gives the option to

delete a specific number or all numbers.

Once the user chooses to delete a number or

all numbers, the system asks the user to

confirm.

●Help

The system announces the available com-

mands.

Recent Calls

●Incoming

Use the Incoming command to make a call

viewing the list of incoming calls.

●Missed

Use the Missed command to make a call

viewing the list of missed calls.

●Outgoing

Use the Outgoing command to make a call

viewing the list of outgoing calls.

●Redial

Use the Redial command to dial the last

outgoing call.

SAA2584

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

●Callback

Use the Callback command to dial the last

incoming call.

●Help

The system announces the available com-

mands.

Connect Phone

●Add Phone

Use the Pair Phone command to connect a

compatible phone to the Bluetooth姞Hands-

Free Phone System.

When asked to enter a PIN code to connect a

Bluetooth姞cellular phone, enter the code

“1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless of the

number of phones connected. Up to 5

phones can be connected. If the user tries to

connect a sixth phone, the system an-

nounces that the user must first delete one

phone or replace an existing phone. If the

user tries to connect a phone that has

already been connected to the vehicle sys-

tem, the system announces the name that

the phone is already using. The connecting

procedure will then be cancelled.

The Add Phone command is not available

when the vehicle is moving.

●Select Phone

Use the Select Phone command to select a

phone of lesser priority when two or more

phones connected with Bluetooth姞Hands-

Free Phone System are in the vehicle at the

same time.

The system asks the user to name the phone

and confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selected

phone remains active until the ignition

switch is turned OFF or a new phone is

selected.

●Delete Phone

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

specific phone or all phones from

Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System. The

system announces the names of the phones

already paired with the system and their

priority level. The system then gives the

option to delete a specific phone, all phones

or listen to the list again. Once the user

SAA2585

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The voice adaptation mode will stop if:

●The button is pressed in voice adap-

tation mode.

●The vehicle is driven during voice adaptation

mode.

●The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or

LOCK position.

INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands-free

operation of the Phone, Navigation, Information

and Audio systems in one of two modes, Stan-

dard Mode or Alternate Command Mode.

In Standard Mode, commands that are available

are always shown on the display and an-

nounced by the system. You can complete your

desired operation by simply following the

prompts given by the system. (See “INFINITI

VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE” later in

this section for details.)

For advanced operation, you can use the Alter-

nate Command Mode. (See “INFINITI VOICE REC-

OGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE” later

in this section for details.) When this mode is

active, an expanded list of commands can be

spoken after pushing the TALK switch,

and the voice command menu prompts are

turned off. Review the expanded command list,

which is available when this mode is active.

Note that in this mode the recognition success

rate may be affected as the number of available

commands and the ways of speaking each

command are increased.

To switch one mode to another, see each mode

description later in this section.

To improve the recognition success rate when

Alternate Command Mode is active, try using

the Speaker Adaptation Function available in

that mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that

Alternate Command Mode be turned off and

Standard Mode be used for the best recognition

performance.

For the voice commands for the navigation

system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s

Manual of your vehicle.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

STANDARD MODE

The following section is applicable when the

Standard Mode is activated.

The Standard Mode enables you to complete

the desired operation by simply following the

prompts that appear on the display and also are

announced by the system.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Activating Standard Mode

When the Alternate Command Mode is active,

perform the following steps to switch to the

Standard Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode”

key.

5. The indicator turns off and the Standard

Mode activates.

Displaying user guide

If you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition system

for the first time or you do not know how to

operate it, you can display the User Guide for

confirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands by

accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-

tains basic instructions and tutorials for several

voice commands.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “User Guide” key.

5. Select a preferred item.

You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say

“Help”.

SAA2529 SAA2530 SAA2531

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

Available items :

●Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate the

INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

●Let’s Practice

Mode that allows practicing by following the

instructions of the system voice.

●Using the Address Book

Tutorial for entering a destination by using

the Address Book.

●Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)

Tutorial for entering a destination by street

address.

●Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice

command operation.

●Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for correct

command recognition by the system.

Note that the Command List feature is only

available when Alternate Command Mode is

active.

Getting Started

Before using the INFINITI Voice Recognition

system for the first time, you can confirm how to

use commands by viewing the Getting Started

section of the User Guide.

1. Select the “Getting Started” key.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the

screen using the INFINITI controller.

Tutorials on the operation of the INFINITI Voice

Recognition system

If you choose “Using the Address Book”, “Find-

ing a Street Address” or “Placing Calls”, you

can view tutorials on how to perform these

operations using INFINITI Voice Recognition.

Let’s Practice

This mode helps learn how to use the INFINITI

Voice Recognition system.

1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key.

2. After the message screen appears, push

the TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

3. Speak the displayed number after the

tone. The evaluation screen will be dis-

played and the result can be confirmed.

SAA2532 SAA2534

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Useful tips for correct operation

You can display useful speaking tips to help the

system recognize your voice commands cor-

rectly.

Select “Help on Speaking” to start display.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is initial-

ized, which may take up to one minute. When

completed, the system is ready to accept voice

commands. If the TALK switch is pushed

before the initialization completes, the display

will show the message: “System not ready.” or

a beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best recognition performance from

INFINITI Voice Recognition, observe the follow-

ing:

●The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to eliminate

the surrounding noises (traffic noise and

vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent

the system from correctly recognizing the

voice commands.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command.

●Speak in a natural conversational voice with-

out pausing between words.

●If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan

speed is automatically lowered so that your

commands can be recognized more easily.

Giving voice commands

1. Push the TALK switch located on the

steering wheel.

SAA2533 SAA1588

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

2. A list of commands appears on the

screen, and the system announces,

“Would you like to access Phone, Naviga-

tion, Information, Audio or Help?”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to ,

speak a command.

Selecting the “Practice” key will start the

practice mode. See “Let’s Practice” earlier in

this section.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu

prompts and speak after the tone sounds

until your desired operation is completed.

Selecting the “Help ” key can display the

detailed information of the each command.

Operating tips :

●Say a command after the tone.

●Commands that are available are always

shown on the display and spoken through

voice menu prompts. Commands other than

those that are displayed are not accepted.

Please follow the prompts given by the

system.

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces, “Please say again”. Repeat

the command in a clear voice.

●Push the BACK button once to return to the

previous screen.

●To exit the voice recognition system, push

and hold the TALK switch. The mes-

sage, “Voice canceled” will be announced.

●To skip the voice guidance function and give

the command immediately, press the TALK

switch to interrupt the system. Re-

member to speak after the tone.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume control

buttons [+] or [⫺] on the steering switch or

use the audio system volume knob while the

system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers :

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers when giving voice com-

mands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For

example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero

zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)

Examples

●1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two

zero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers

You can improve the recognition of phone num-

bers by saying the phone number in three

groups of numbers. For example, when you try

to call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero”

first, and the system will then ask you for the

next three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After

recognition, the system will then ask for the last

four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this

method of phone digit entry can improve recog-

nition performance.

SAA2535

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When speaking a house number, speak the

number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is

included in the house number, it will not be

recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you

speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak

“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the

letter “o (oh)”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

Command List

Category Command:

Command Action

Phone Operates the Phone function

Navigation Operates the Navigation function

Information Displays the vehicle Information function

Audio Operates the Audio function.

Help Displays User Guide

●Phone Command:

Command Action

Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.

Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.

Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Navigation Command:

Command Action

Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.

Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.

Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

●Information Command:

Command Action

Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.

Maintenance Displays maintenance information.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Where am I? Displays your current location.

●Audio Command:

Command Action

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

XM Turns to the XM Satellite band, selecting the channel last played.

Music Box姞Turns on the “Music Box姞” hard drive audio system.

CD Starts to play a CD.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

●General Commands

Command Action

Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Speak “011811112223333”. 6. Speak “Dial”.

7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222-

3333.

Note :

Any digit input format is available in the Inter-

national Number input process.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION

ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE

The following section is applicable when Alter-

nate Command Mode is activated.

When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an

expanded list of commands can be used after

pressing the TALK switch. In this mode,

available commands are not fully shown on the

display or prompted. Review the expanded

command list when this mode is active. See

examples of Alternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recognition

success rate may be affected as the number of

available commands and ways of speaking each

command are increased. To improve the recog-

nition success rate, try using the Speaker Ad-

aptation Function available in that mode. (See

“Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate

Command Mode)” later in this section.) Other-

wise it is recommended that Alternate Com-

mand Mode be turned OFF and Standard Mode

be used for the best recognition performance.

SAA2541 SAA2542

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

Activating Alternate Command Mode

When the Standard Mode is active, perform the

following steps to switch to the Alternate Com-

mand Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”

key.

5. The confirmation message is displayed on

the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate

the Alternate Command Mode.

Displaying command list

If you are controlling the system by voice

commands for the first time or do not know the

appropriate voice command, perform the fol-

lowing procedure for displaying the voice com-

mand list (available only in Alternate Command

Mode).

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Command List” key.

SAA2529 SAA2543 SAA2544

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Select a category from the list. 6. Select an item.

7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the

INFINITI controller to view the entire list.

8. Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

SAA2545 SAA2546

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

●Push the BACK button once to return to the

previous screen.

●If you want to cancel the command, push

and hold the TALK switch for 1 sec-

ond. The message “Voice canceled” will be

announced.

●To skip the voice guidance function and give

the command immediately, press the TALK

switch to interrupt the system. Re-

member to speak after the tone.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume control

switch (+ or ⫺) on the steering wheel or use

the audio system volume knob while the

system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers :

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers when giving voice com-

mands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For

example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero

zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the follow-

ing examples:

●1-800-662-6200

– “Dial one eight zero zero six six two six

two zero zero.”

Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone

dialing results, say phone numbers as single

digits.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five

five six thousands”.

Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak

the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)”

is included in the house number, it will not be

recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you

speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak

“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the

letter “o (oh)”.

Speaker adaptation function (for

Alternate Command Mode)

The voice recognition system has a function to

learn the user’s voice for better voice recogni-

tion performance. The system can memorize the

voices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s voice:

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel and select the “Others” key.

2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

SAA2549

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137

Speaker Adaptation function settings :

Edit User Name

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed

on the screen.

Delete Voice Data

Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-

tion system has learned.

Continuous Learning

When this item is turned to ON, you can have

the system learn the voice commands in suc-

cession, without selecting commands one by

one.

Minimize voice feedback (for

Alternate Command Mode)

To minimize the voice feedback from the sys-

tem, perform the following steps.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback”

key.

5. The setting is turned to ON and the voice

guidance will now be reduced when using

the Voice Recognition system.

SAA2553

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for

the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the

system fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these

in place.

The system consistently selects the wrong voic-

etag in the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-

FREE PHONE SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” earlier in this section; page 4-93.)

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving .............. 5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).................. 5-2

Three-way catalyst ............................. 5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......... 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover................... 5-5

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions .................................... 5-5

Off-road recovery............................... 5-6

Rapid air pressure loss ......................... 5-6

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving .............. 5-7

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving safety

precautions (for AWD models) ................... 5-7

Push-button ignition switch ........................ 5-8

Operating range for engine start function......... 5-8

Push-button ignition switch operation............ 5-9

Steering lock (if so equipped) ................... 5-9

Push-button ignition switch positions ............ 5-9

Emergency engine shut off ..................... 5-10

Intelligent Key battery discharge................ 5-10

Before starting the engine .........................5-11

Starting the engine................................5-11

Driving the vehicle ................................5-12

Automatic transmission .........................5-12

Parking brake.................................... 5-16

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system (if so

equipped) ........................................5-17

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system .......... 5-18

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system......... 5-20

Lane camera unit maintenance ................. 5-24

Blind spot warning (BSW) system (if so equipped) . . 5-25

Bsw system operation ......................... 5-26

Bsw driving situations ......................... 5-28

Bsw malfunction ...............................5-31

System maintenance ...........................5-31

Cruise control.................................... 5-32

Precautions on cruise control................... 5-32

Cruise control operations ...................... 5-33

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (FULL

SPEED RANGE) (if so equipped) .................... 5-34

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode ................................. 5-35

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ........ 5-35

Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode ................................. 5-36

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

operation..................................... 5-37

Conventional (FIXED SPEED) cruise control

mode ........................................ 5-50

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who would

normally require the support of others alone

in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone

either. They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause severe

or possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

●Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo

higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain

colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.

Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause

unconsciousness or death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-

ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fully

open, and have the vehicle inspected

immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces such

as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine run-

ning for any extended length of time.

●Keep the lift gate closed while driving, oth-

erwise exhaust gases could be drawn into

the passenger compartment. If you must

drive with the lift gate open, follow these

precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation to off and

the fan control to high to circulate the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable connec-

tions must pass to a trailer through the seal

on the lift gate or the body, follow the manu-

facturer’s recommendation to prevent car-

bon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be in-

spected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

– The vehicle is raised for service.

– You suspect that exhaust fumes are en-

tering into the passenger compartment.

– You notice a change in the sound of the

exhaust system.

– You have had an accident involving dam-

age to the exhaust system, underbody, or

rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are

very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable

materials away from the exhaust system

components.

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry grass, waste

paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a

fire.

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from

leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three-

way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust

pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

and low tire pressure is detected. The CHECK

TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when the

low tire pressure warning light turns off.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not

appear if the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates in low

ambient temperature, check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONI-

TORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates while driving, avoid sudden steering

maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle

speed, pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving

with under-inflated tires may permanently

damage the tires and increase the likelihood

of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could

occur and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If the light still illumi-

nates while driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case

of emergency” section for changing a flat

tire.)

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function and the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Contact your INFINITI

retailer as soon as possible for tire replace-

ment and/or system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the proper

operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire

sealant into the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

●The TPMS may not function properly when

the wheels are equipped with tire chains or

the wheels are buried in snow.

●Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals from

the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. Some examples are:

●Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

●If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

5-4 Starting and driving

●If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner may result in loss of control or

an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As

with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in

a collision with other vehicles or objects, or

cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the

loss of control causes the vehicle to slide side-

ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid

driving when tired. Never drive when under the

influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which may

cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt

as outlined in the “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety

— Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to be injured or killed than a

person properly wearing a seat belt.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-

over rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than pas-

senger cars to make them capable of perform-

ing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road

applications. This gives them a higher center of

gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of

higher ground clearance is a better view of the

road, allowing you to anticipate problems. How-

ever, they are not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as conventional passenger cars

any more than low-slung sports cars are de-

signed to perform satisfactorily under off-road

conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns

or abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. As with other vehicles of this type,

failure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Seat

belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions

and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or

improperly belted person is significantly more

likely to be injured or killed than a person

properly wearing a seat belt.

Starting and driving 5-5

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

either contact a roadside emergency ser-

vice to change the tire or see “CHANGING

A FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emer-

gency” section of this Owner’s Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or

drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces co-

ordination, delays reaction time and impairs

judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol in-

creases the likelihood of being involved in an

accident injuring yourself and others. Addition-

ally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol

can increase the severity of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influ-

ence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people

are injured or killed in alcohol-related acci-

dents. Although the local laws vary on what is

considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is

that alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of alco-

hol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired

by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical con-

dition.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (for AWD

models)

WARNING

●Do not drive beyond the performance capa-

bility of the tires, even with AWD engaged.

Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneu-

vers or sudden braking may cause loss of

control.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-

dial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.

Install tire chains on the rear wheels when

driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.

●This vehicle is not designed for offroad

(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy or

muddy roads that tires may get stuck in.

●For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt

to raise two wheels off the ground and shift

the transmission to any D (Drive) or R (Re-

verse) position with the engine running. Do-

ing so may result in drivetrain damage or

unexpected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped ve-

hicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer, (such as

the dynamometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equipment

even if the other two wheels are raised off

the ground. Make sure you inform test facil-

ity personnel that your vehicle is equipped

with AWD before it is placed on a dynamom-

eter. Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal injury.

●When a wheel is off the ground due to an

unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel

excessively.

Starting and driving 5-7

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition switch

while driving the vehicle except in an emer-

gency. (The engine will stop when the ignition

switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the

ignition switch is pushed and held for more

than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the

vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a

crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition

switch, be sure to move the selector lever to the

P (Park) position. OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting

the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range 䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present near

the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-

tem’s operating range becomes narrower and

may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push

the ignition switch to start the engine.

●The trunk area is not included in the operat-

ing range but the Intelligent Key may func-

tion.

●If the Intelligent Key is on the instrument

panel, cargo area, inside the glove box or

door pocket, or the corner of interior com-

partment, it may not be possible to start the

engine.

●If the Intelligent Key is near the door or door

glass outside the vehicle, it may be possible

to start the engine.

SSD0436

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-8 Starting and driving

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

OPERATION

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch

position will change as follows:

●Push center once to change to ACC.

●Push center two times to change to ON.

●Push center three times to change to OFF.

(No position illuminates.)

●Push center four times to return to ACC.

●Open or close any door to return to LOCK

during the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to LOCK

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When the ignition switch cannot be switched

toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion. The ignition switch position indicator

will not illuminate.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON

position and the brake pedal is depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the

push-button ignition switch cannot be turned

from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal dis-

play between the speedometer and tachometer.

(See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

STEERING LOCK (if so equipped)

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, push the ignition

switch to the OFF position. To unlock the steer-

ing wheel, push the ignition switch.

If the steering lock release malfunction indica-

tor appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal

display, push the push-button ignition switch

again while lightly turning the steering wheel

right and left. (See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYS-

TAL DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.)

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key in-

serted in the port.

SSD1021

Starting and driving 5-9

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio, when the engine is not

running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

OFF

The engine can be turned off in this position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button

ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the

engine is not running for an extended period.

This can discharge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving perform the following procedure:

●Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times.

●Push and hold the push button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost

discharged, the guide light 䊊

Bof the Intelligent

Key port 䊊

Ablinks and the indicator appears on

the dot matrix liquid crystal display. (See “DOT

MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section.)

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into

the port 䊊

1allows you to start the engine. Make

sure that the key ring side faces backward as

illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port

until it is latched and secured.

To remove the Intelligent Key from the port,

push the ignition switch to the OFF position and

pull the Intelligent Key out of the port.

SSD0785

5-10 Starting and driving

NOTE:

The Intelligent Key port does not charge the In-

telligent Key battery. If you see the low battery

indicator in the dot matrix liquid crystal display,

replace the battery as soon as possible. (See

“INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.)

CAUTION

●Never place anything except the Intelligent

Key in the Intelligent Key port. Doing so may

cause damage to the equipment.

●Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the cor-

rect direction when inserting it to the Intelli-

gent Key port. The engine may not start if it is

in the incorrect direction.

●Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-

gent Key port after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as

frequently as possible, or at least whenever

you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Lock all doors.

●Position seat and adjust head restraints.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section.)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the selector lever is in either of the above

positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. Depress the brake pedal and push

the ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal with the ignition switch in

any position.

●If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when restart-

ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little

(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while

holding, crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to start cranking the engine. After 5

or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to OFF. After cranking

the engine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by depressing the brake

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-11

pedal and pushing the push-button igni-

tion switch to start the engine. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15

seconds at a time. If the engine does not start,

push the ignition switch to OFF and wait 10

seconds before cranking again, otherwise the

starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the en-

gine while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather. In cold weather, keep the

engine running for a minimum of2-3

minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever

to the P (Park) position and push the

ignition switch to the OFF position.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

7 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled by a transmission con-

trol module to produce maximum efficiency and

smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the recom-

mended operating procedures for this transmis-

sion. Follow these procedures for maximum

vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot

brake pedal and push the selector lever button

before shifting the selector lever to the R (Re-

verse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), DS (Drive Sport) or

Manual shift mode position. Be sure the vehicle

is fully stopped before attempting to shift the

selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is designed

so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed

before shifting from P (Park) to any drive posi-

tion while the ignition switch position is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of the P

(Park) position and into any of the other gear

positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the

LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

push the selector lever button to shift into

a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,

then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal while

shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Re-

verse), D (Drive), DS (Drive Sport) or manual

shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal

until shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and have an

accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use cau-

tion when shifting into a forward or reverse

gear before the engine has warmed up.

●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while

vehicle is moving forward. Never shift to P

(Park), D (Drive) or DS (Drive Sport) while

vehicle is moving rearward. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and have an

accident.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-12 Starting and driving

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N

(Neutral) position while driving. Doing so

can cause a loss of engine braking which

may result in a collision, serious personal

injury or death. In addition, coasting with

the transmission in the N (Neutral) position

may cause serious damage to the

transmission.

CAUTION

●When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing

the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should

be used for this purpose.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads.

This may cause a loss of control.

Shifting

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the selector lever.

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and shift the selector lever from P

(Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), DS

(Drive Sport) or Manual shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be selected

without pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is

in any position while the engine is not running.

Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious

personal injury or property damage.

CAUTION

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped

and the transmission is in the P (Park) position.

P (Park) position :

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the selector lever

button pushed in to move the selector lever from

the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to

the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Selector lever

SSD0712

Starting and driving 5-13

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped.

R (Reverse) :

Use this position to back up. Always be sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must

be depressed and the selector lever button

pushed in to move the selector lever from the P

(Park) position, the N (Neutral) position or any

drive position to the R (Reverse) position.

N (Neutral) :

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart

a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive) :

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

DS (Drive Sport) mode

Move the selector lever from D (Drive) to the left

into the manual shift gate. The transmission

position indicator in the meter shows “DS”.

In the DS (Drive Sport) mode, the transmission

changes to the “sporty” driving shift operation,

creating a more aggressive acceleration feeling

than the D (Drive) mode and providing a gear

change sensation when the driver accelerates

quickly.

When the driver selects the manual shift mode

using the selector lever during the DS (Drive

Sport) mode operation, the driver must move

the selector lever from DS (Drive Sport) to D

(Drive) and back again to re-select the DS (Drive

Sport) mode.

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is in the DS (Drive

Sport) position, the transmission is ready for

the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be

selected manually by moving the selector lever

up or down.

When shifting up, move the selector lever to the

+ (up) side. The transmission shifts to the

higher range.

When shifting down, move the selector lever to

the ⫺(down) side. The transmission shifts to

the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode, return

the selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The

transmission returns to the normal driving

mode.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1→

←

2→

←

3→

←

4→

←

5→

←

6→

←

7 (7th) :

Use these positions for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

6 (6th) and

5 (5th) :

Use this position when driving up long slopes,

or for engine braking when driving down long

slopes.

4 (4th),

3 (3rd) and

2 (2nd) :

Use these positions for hill climbing or engine

braking on downhill grades.

1 (1st) :

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or

for maximum engine braking on steep downhill

grades.

●Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than 7th

gear. This reduces fuel economy.

5-14 Starting and driving

When the interior temperature is reduced, the

LDW system will resume operating automati-

cally and the warning systems ON indicator will

stop flashing.

LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP)

SYSTEM

Precautions on LDP system

WARNING

●The LDP system will not steer the vehicle or

prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s re-

sponsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep

the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in

control of vehicle at all times.

●The LDP system is primarily intended for use

on well-developed freeways or highways. It

may not detect the lane markers in certain

roads, weather or driving conditions.

●Using the LDP system under some condi-

tions of road, lane marker or weather, or

when you change lanes without using the

lane change signal could lead to an unex-

pected system operation. In such condi-

tions, you need to correct the vehicle’s direc-

tion with your steering operation to avoid

accidents.

●When the LDP system is operating, avoid

excessive or sudden steering maneuvers.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the

vehicle.

●The LDP system will not operate at speeds

below approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h) or if

it cannot detect lane markers.

●The LDP system may not function properly

under the following conditions, and do not

use the LDP system:

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

wind, etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads, such as

on ice or snow, etc.

– When driving on winding or uneven roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to road

repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift lane.

– When driving on roads where the lane

width is too narrow.

– When driving without normal tire condi-

tions (for example, tire wear, low tire

pressure, installation of spare tire, tire

chains, non-standard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with non-

original brake parts or suspension parts.

●If the LDP system malfunctions, it will cancel

automatically. The lane departure warning

light (orange) on the instrument panel will

illuminate.

●If the lane departure warning light (orange)

illuminates, pull off the road to a safe loca-

tion and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the warning light

(orange) continues to illuminate, have the

LDP system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the warn-

ing chime sound, and the chime may not be

heard.

The functions of the LDP system (warning and

brake control assist) may or may not operate

properly under the following conditions:

●On roads where there are multiple parallel

lane markers; lane markers that are faded or

not painted clearly; yellow painted lane

markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane

markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

●On roads where discontinued lane markers

are still detectable.

●On roads where there are sharp curves.

5-20 Starting and driving

3. To set the LDP system to on or off, high-

light the “Lane Departure Prevention”

key, select ON or OFF and push the ENTER

䊊

button.

If you set all of the systems to disable and push

the dynamic driver assistance switch, the indi-

cator of the disabled system will blink for

approximately 4 seconds and turn off. (See

“DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM”

later in this section.)

Automatic deactivation

Condition A :

The warning and assist functions of the LDP

system are not designed to work under the

following conditions:

●When you operate the lane change signal

and change the traveling lanes in the direc-

tion of the signal. (The LDP system will be

deactivated for approximately 2 seconds af-

ter the lane change signal is turned off.)

●When the vehicle speed lowers to less than

approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished and

the necessary operating conditions are satis-

fied, the warning and assist functions will re-

sume.

Condition B :

The assist function of the LDP system is not

designed to work under the following condi-

tions (warning is still functional):

●When the brake pedal is depressed.

●When the steering wheel is turned as far as

necessary for the vehicle to change lanes.

●When the accelerator pedal is depressed

while the brake control assist is provided.

●When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

approach warning occurs.

●When the hazard warning flashers are oper-

ated.

●When driving on a curve at high speed.

After the above conditions have finished and

the necessary operating conditions are satis-

fied, the LDP brake control assist function will

resume.

Condition C :

Under the following conditions, a beep will

sound and the LDP system will be canceled

automatically. The LDP ON indicator light will

blink in green, and the LDP system cannot be

activated:

●When the VDC system (except TCS function)

or ABS operates.

●When the VDC system is turned off.

●When the SNOW mode switch is turned on.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, turn

off the LDP system by pushing the LDP switch.

Push the LDP switch again to turn the LDP

system back on.

Temporary disabled status at high temperature :

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under

high temperature conditions (over approxi-

mately 104°F (40°C)) and then the LDP system is

turned on, the LDP system may be deactivated

automatically. The LDP ON indicator (green) will

blink.

SSD0886

Starting and driving 5-23

When the interior temperature is reduced, the

system will resume operating automatically and

the LDP ON indicator will stop blinking.

LANE CAMERA UNIT MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit 䊊

1for the LDW/LDP

system is located inside the map light cover. To

keep the proper operation of the LDW/LDP

systems and prevent a system malfunction, be

sure to observe the following:

●Always keep the windshield clean.

●Do not attach a sticker (including transpar-

ent material) or install an accessory near the

camera unit.

●Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s capability of

detecting the lane markers.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. Do not touch the camera

lens or remove the screw located on the

camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged

due to an accident, contact an INFINITI re-

tailer.

SSD0453

5-24 Starting and driving

WARNING

●The BSW system is not a replacement for

proper driving procedure and is not de-

signed to prevent contact with vehicles or

objects. When changing lanes, always use

the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in

the direction you will move to ensure it is

safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW system.

●The BSW system may not provide a warning

for vehicles that pass through the detection

zone quickly.

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the BSW indicator light next to

the outside mirror will illuminate in the direc-

tion of the detected vehicle. If the turn signal is

then activated, the BSW indicator light flashes

and a chime sounds twice. The indicator light

continues to flash until the detected vehicle

leaves the detection zone.

The BSW indicator lights illuminate for a few

seconds when the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position.

BSW indicator light

SSD1086

BSW system warning light

SSD1029

Warning systems switch

SSD1156

5-26 Starting and driving

To resume the preset speed, push and release

the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

maintains a selected distance from the vehicle

in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90

MPH (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The

set speed can be selected by the driver between

20 to 90 MPH (32 to 144 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road

ahead is clear.

The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise

control modes.

●Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

For maintaining a selected distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you

up to the preset speed.

●Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode:

For cruising at a preset speed.

WARNING

●Always drive carefully and attentively when

using either cruise control mode. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly

before using the cruise control. To avoid se-

rious injury or death, do not rely on the sys-

tem to prevent accidents or to control the

vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do

not use cruise control except in appropriate

road and traffic conditions.

●In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode, a warning chime will not sound to

warn you if you are too close to the vehicle

ahead. Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead

of you or a collision could occur.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

SYSTEM (FULL SPEED RANGE) (if so

equipped)

5-34 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode

Push the MAIN switch 䊊

Ato choose the cruise

control mode between the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode 䊊

1and the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode 䊊

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode 䊊

1, quickly push and release the

MAIN switch 䊊

A. To choose the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode 䊊

2, push and

hold the MAIN switch 䊊

Afor longer than ap-

proximately 1.5 seconds.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be

changed to the other cruise control mode. To

change the mode, push the MAIN switch once to

turn the system off. Then push the MAIN switch

again to turn the system back on and select the

desired cruise control mode.

Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent

Cruise Control system display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, see the following description. For the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode,

see page 5-50.

SELECTING THE VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE

DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode 䊊

1, quickly push and release the

MAIN switch 䊊

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode,

the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system auto-

matically maintains a selected distance from

the vehicle traveling in front of you according to

that vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at

the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

With ICC, the driver can maintain the same

speed as other vehicles without the constant

need to adjust the set speed as you would with

a normal cruise control system.

SSD0899

Starting and driving 5-35

PRECAUTIONS ON VEHICLE-TO-

VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

The system is intended to enhance the opera-

tion of the vehicle when following a vehicle

traveling in the same lane and direction.

If the distance sensor 䊊

Adetects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce

the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows

the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle

and applies the brakes (up to 25% of vehicle

braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is approxi-

mately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

WARNING

●This system is only an aid to assist the driver

and is not a collision warning or avoidance

device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

●The system is primarily intended for use on

straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It

is not advisable to use the system in city

traffic or congested areas.

●This system will not adapt automatically to

road conditions. This system should be used

in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the sys-

tem on roads with sharp curves, or on icy

roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

The distance sensor will not detect the follow-

ing objects:

●Stationary and slow moving vehicles

●Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

●Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

●Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

WARNING

●As there is a performance limit to the dis-

tance control function, never rely solely on

the Intelligent Cruise Control system. This

system does not correct careless, inatten-

tive or absent-minded driving, or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by de-

pressing the brake pedal, depending on the

distance to the vehicle ahead and the sur-

rounding circumstances in order to maintain

a safe distance between vehicles.

●If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the

limitations of the system. The system will

cancel once it judges that the vehicle has

come to a standstill and sound a warning

chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving,

the driver must depress the brake pedal.

●The system may not detect the vehicle in

front of you in certain road or weather condi-

tions. To avoid accidents, never use the In-

telligent Cruise Control system under the

following conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy or

there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on ice

or snow, etc.

SSD0701

5-36 Starting and driving

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When the windshield wiper is operated at

the low speed (LO) or high speed (HI) po-

sition, the Intelligent Cruise Control sys-

tem is automatically canceled.

– When strong light (for example, at sun-

rise or sunset) is directly shining on the

front of the vehicle

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the sys-

tem sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may

go beyond the set vehicle speed and fre-

quent braking may result in overheating

the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill roads

– When traffic conditions make it difficult to

keep a proper distance between vehicles

because of frequent acceleration or

deceleration

●Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Control sys-

tem if you are towing a trailer. The system

may not detect a vehicle ahead.

●In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle

or object can unexpectedly come into the

sensor detection zone and cause automatic

braking. You may need to control the dis-

tance from other vehicles using the accelera-

tor pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using

the ICC system when it is not recommended

in this section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation of the

vehicle and be ready to manually control the

proper following distance. The vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode of the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system may not be able to

maintain the selected distance between ve-

hicles (following distance) or selected vehicle

speed under some circumstances.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

uses a sensor 䊊

Alocated on the front of the

vehicle to detect vehicles traveling ahead. The

sensor generally detects the signals returned

from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead. There-

SSD0701

Starting and driving 5-37

fore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflector on

the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not

maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the

sensor cannot detect the signals:

●When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is

positioned high on the vehicle (trailer, etc.)

●When the reflector on the vehicle ahead is

missing, damaged or covered

●When the reflector of the vehicle ahead is

covered with dirt, snow and road spray

●When the snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility

●When dense exhaust or other smoke (black

smoke) from vehicles reduces the sensor’s

visibility

●When excessively heavy baggage is loaded

in the rear seat or the luggage room of your

vehicle

The ICC system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s operation within the limita-

tion of the system. When the sensor is covered

with dirt or is obstructed, the system will auto-

matically be canceled. If the sensor is covered

with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,

etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In

these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode may not cancel and may not be

able to maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and

clean the sensor regularly.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is

designed to maintain a selected distance and

reduce the speed to match the slower vehicle

ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as

necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a

stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill.

However, the ICC system can only apply up to

25% of the vehicles total braking power. This

system should only be used when traffic condi-

tions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly

constant or when vehicle speeds change gradu-

ally. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane

ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly

decelerates, the distance between vehicles may

become closer because the ICC system cannot

decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this

occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning

chime and blink the system display to notify the

driver to take necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning chime will

sound if the speed is below approximately 15

MPH (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected

ahead. The system will also disengage when

the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.

See “Approach warning” later in this section.

The following items are controlled in the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

●When there are no vehicles traveling ahead,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

maintains the speed set by the driver. The

set speed range is between approximately

20 and 90 MPH (32 and 144 km/h).

●When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ad-

justs the speed to maintain the distance,

selected by driver, from the vehicle ahead.

The adjusting speed range is up to the set

speed. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within

the limitations of the system. The system

will cancel once it judges a standstill with a

warning chime.

●When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved

out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode accelerates

and maintains vehicle speed up to the set

speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed

or warn you when you approach stationary and

slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to

vehicle operation to maintain proper distance

from vehicles ahead when approaching toll

gates or traffic congestion.

5-38 Starting and driving

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited.

A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone

for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection

mode to maintain the selected distance from

the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the de-

tection zone due to its position within the same

lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected

in the same lane ahead if they are traveling

offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle

that is entering the lane ahead may not be

detected until the vehicle has completely

moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC

system may warn you by blinking the system

indicator and sounding the chime. The driver

may have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0252

Starting and driving 5-39

When driving on some roads, such as winding,

hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are

under construction, the ICC sensor may detect

vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily

not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may

cause the ICC system to decelerate or acceler-

ate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or trav-

eling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle con-

dition. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and sound-

ing the chime unexpectedly. You will have to

manually control the proper distance away from

the vehicle traveling ahead.

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and

approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead,

the ICC will adjust the speed to maintain the

distance, selected by the driver, from the ve-

hicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes

or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accel-

erate and maintain the speed up to the set

speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to

maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates

to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on

winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will

have to manually control the vehicle speed.

Intelligent cruise control switch

The system is operated by a MAIN switch and

four control switches, all mounted on the steer-

ing wheel.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:

Sets desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

SSD0253 SSD0254

5-40 Starting and driving

4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch:

Master switch to activate the system

5. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following dis-

tance:

●Long

●Middle

●Short

Intelligent cruise control system

display and indicators

The display is located between the speedom-

eter and tachometer.

1) MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2) Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in

front of you.

3) Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between

vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

4) Indicates your vehicle

5) Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

6) Intelligent Cruise Control system warn-

ing light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a malfunc-

tion in the ICC system.

SSD0900 SSD0606

Starting and driving 5-41

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the indicators come on as illustrated

to check for a burned-out bulb, and it turns off

when the engine is started.

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push and

release the MAIN switch 䊊

Aon. The cruise

indicator light, set distance indicator and set

vehicle speed indicator come on and in a

standby state for setting.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to

the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch

and release it. (Vehicle ahead detection indica-

tor, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed

indicator come on.) Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the

set speed.

SSD0607 SSD0901 SSD0902

5-42 Starting and driving

– When dense exhaust or other smoke

(black smoke) from vehicles reduces the

visibility of the sensor.

– When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the luggage

room of your vehicle.

– When abruptly accelerating or

decelerating.

– On a steep downhill slope or on roads

with sharp curves.

– When there is a highly reflective object

near the vehicle ahead (i.e., being very

close to another vehicle, signboard, etc.)

– When you are towing a trailer.

●Depending on certain road conditions

(curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle con-

ditions (steering position or vehicle posi-

tion), or the preceding vehicle’s conditions

(position in lane, etc.), the system may not

function properly. The system may detect

highly reflective objects such as reflectors,

signs, white markers, and other stationary

objects on the road or near the traveling lane

and provide unnecessary warning.

●The system may not function in offset

conditions.

●The system may not function when the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead is extremely

close.

WARNING

●The system may detect highly reflective ob-

jects such as reflectors, signs, white mark-

ers and other stationary objects on the road

or near the traveling lane.

In extreme conditions, detection of these ob-

jects may cause the system to function.

Reflectors on the road

SSD0782

Starting and driving 5-71

●The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality. If the sen-

sor is covered with ice, a transparent or

translucent plastic bag, etc., the system may

not detect them. In these instances the sys-

tem may not be able to warn the driver prop-

erly. Be sure to check and clean the sensor

regularly.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the warn-

ing chime sound, and the chime may not be

heard.

●Never place your foot under the brake pedal

when the IBA system turns on. Your foot may

be caught when the system controls the

brake.

●A sudden appearance of a vehicle in front

(i.e., it abruptly cuts in) may not be detected

and the system may not warn the driver soon

enough.

●The system will be cancelled automatically

with a beep sound and the IBA warning light

will illuminate under the following

conditions:

– When the sensor window is dirty

– When the system malfunctions

If the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates with a

beep sound, pull off the road to a safe location,

stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. Check

to see if the sensor window is dirty. If the

sensor window is dirty, clean it with a soft cloth

and restart the engine. If the sensor window is

not dirty, restart the engine. If the IBA OFF

indicator light continues to illuminate even if

the IBA system is turned on, have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

IBA system operation

The IBA system will function when your vehicle

is driven at speeds of approximately 10 MPH (15

km/h) or above, and when the vehicle’s speed

is approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster than

that of the vehicle ahead.

To turn the system off/on, push and hold the

IBA OFF switch 䊊

Bfor more than 1 second after

starting the engine. When the IBA OFF indicator

light 䊊

Aon the instrument panel turns off and

the IBA OFF switch is pushed, the system will

turn off and the IBA OFF indicator light will

illuminate. When the IBA OFF switch is pushed

again, the system will turn on and the IBA OFF

indicator light will turn off.

SSD0887

5-72 Starting and driving

The IBA system will remain in the last ON or OFF

state it was left in until it is manually changed

by pressing the IBA OFF switch.

Illumination of the IBA OFF indicator light with-

out the warning chime sound is an indication

that the IBA system is temporarily unavailable.

It will occur under the following conditions:

– When driving into a strong light (for example,

sunlight)

The IBA OFF indicator light will turn off when the

system returns to its normal operating condi-

tions.

For the sensor maintenance, see “INTELLIGENT

CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) SYSTEM (FULL SPEED

RANGE)” earlier in this section.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow

these recommendations to obtain maximum

engine performance and ensure the future reli-

ability and economy of your new vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommendations may

result in shortened engine life and reduced en-

gine performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

●Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.

●Select a gear range suitable to road condi-

tions.

●Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

●Keep the tires inflated at the correct pres-

sure. Improper tire pressure will increase

wear and waste fuel.

●Make sure the front wheels are properly

aligned. Improper alignment will cause pre-

mature tire wear and lower fuel economy.

●Climate control operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

●When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Starting and driving 5-73

The AWD warning light is located in the meter.

The AWD warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. It

turns off soon after the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system

while the engine is running, the warning light

will come on.

The warning light may blink rapidly (about twice

per second) while trying to free a stuck vehicle

due to high power train oil temperature. The

driving mode may change to two-wheel drive. If

the warning light blinks rapidly during opera-

tion, stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a

safe place immediately. Then if the light goes

off after a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of

front and rear wheels will make the warning

light blink slowly (about once per two seconds).

Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. Check that all tire sizes are the same,

tire pressure is correct and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is blinking after the above

operation, have your vehicle checked by an

INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

WARNING

●For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt

to raise two wheels off the ground and shift

the transmission to any drive or reverse po-

sition with the engine running. Doing so may

result in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal injury.

●Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped ve-

hicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as

the dynamometers used by some states for

emissions testing) or similar equipment

even if the other two wheels are raised off

the ground. Make sure that you inform the

test facility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with AWD before it is placed on a

dynamometer. Using the wrong test equip-

ment may result in drivetrain damage or un-

expected vehicle movement which could re-

sult in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the engine on a free roller

when any of the wheels are raised.

SSD0336

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)

5-74 Starting and driving

●If the warning light comes on while driving

there may be a malfunction in the AWD sys-

tem. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your

vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as

soon as possible.

●If the warning light remains on after the

above operation, have your vehicle checked

by an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

●The power train may be damaged if you con-

tinue driving with the warning light blinking.

Starting and driving 5-75

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry grass, waste

paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a

fire.

●Never leave the engine running while the

vehicle is unattended.

●Do not leave children unattended inside the

vehicle. They could unknowingly activate

switches or controls. Unattended children

could become involved in serious accidents.

●Safe parking procedures require that both

the parking brake be applied and the trans-

mission be placed in the P (Park) position.

Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and result in

an accident.

●Make sure the automatic transmission se-

lector lever has been pushed as far forward

as it can go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into the street when parked on a sloping

drive way, it is a good practice to turn the

wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move

the vehicle forward until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL,

NO CURB: 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away from

the center of the road if it moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

SD1006MA

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-76 Starting and driving

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off while

driving, the power assist for the steering will

not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

much greater steering effort is needed, espe-

cially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

You may feel a small click and hear a sound

when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly.

This is not a malfunction and indicates that the

brake assist mechanism is operating properly.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. How-

ever, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal

will be required to stop the vehicle and the

stopping distance will be longer.

When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and

firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a

slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates

that the Brake Assist System is operating.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes function correctly.

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weak-

ened or whenever the parking brake shoes

and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to

assure the best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle ser-

vice manual and can be performed by an

INFINITI retailer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will cause overheating of the

brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster

and reduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-77

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If

suspension parts such as shock absorbers,

struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings

and wheels are not INFINITI recommended

for your vehicle or are extremely deterio-

rated, the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly. This could adversely affect vehicle han-

dling performance, and the VDC warning

light may illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake pads,

rotors and calipers are not INFINITI recom-

mended or are extremely deteriorated, the

VDC system may not operate properly and

the VDC warning light may illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

INFINITI recommended or are extremely de-

teriorated, the VDC warning light may

illuminate.

●When driving on extremely inclined surfaces

such as higher banked corners, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and the VDC

warning light may illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface such as

a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the VDC

warning light may illuminate. This is

not a malfunction. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI rec-

ommended ones are used, the VDC system

may not operate properly and the VDC warn-

ing light may illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for winter

tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the

key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

outside temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check antifreeze to assure proper winter protec-

tion. For additional information, see “ENGINE

COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during ex-

tremely cold weather conditions, the battery

fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To

maintain maximum efficiency, the battery

should be checked regularly. For additional

information, see “BATTERY” in the “8. Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including

the engine block. Refill before operating the

vehicle. For details, see “ENGINE COOLING SYS-

TEM” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-83

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program ...................... 6-2

Emergency engine shut off ......................... 6-2

Flat tire........................................... 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......... 6-2

Changing a flat tire............................. 6-3

Jump starting .....................................6-8

Push starting .................................... 6-10

If your vehicle overheats .......................... 6-10

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-11

Towing recommended by INFINITI ............... 6-12

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)........ 6-14

●Use only the jack provided with your vehicle

to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack pro-

vided with your vehicle on other vehicles.

The jack is designed for lifting only your ve-

hicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any

other part of the vehicle for jack support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is

on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to

move. This is especially true for vehicles

with limited slip differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the ve-

hicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the

jack body and the following instructions.

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head be-

tween the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm ground.

Jack-up point

SCE0731

In case of emergency 6-5

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns

by turning counterclockwise with the

wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire

clears the ground. To lift the vehicle,

securely hold the jack lever and rod with

both hands as shown above. Remove the

wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The T-type spare tire is designed for emergency

use. (See specific instructions under the head-

ing “WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.)

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the se-

quence as illustrated (

䊊

)

until they are tight.

SCE0504 SCE0661

6-6 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts se-

curely in the sequence as illustrated.

Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened

wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become

loose or come off. This could cause an

accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or

nuts. This could cause the nuts to become

loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle

has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)

(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to speci-

fication at all times. It is recommended that

wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at

each lubrication interval.

●Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for three

hours or more or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to the

driver side center pillar.

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack and

tools in the storage area.

2. Close the luggage floor board.

3. Close the lift gate.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire and

jacking equipment are properly secured af-

ter use. Such items can become dangerous

projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

●The T-type spare tire and small size spare

tire are designed for emergency use. See

specific instructions under the heading

“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is available.

Please see your Warranty Information Booklet

or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free

number to call (U.S.) or Warranty Information

Booklet (Canada).

In case of emergency 6-7

Specyfikacje produktu

Marka:	Infiniti
Kategoria:	Samochód osobowy
Model:	EX35 - 2011

Potrzebujesz pomocy?

Jeśli potrzebujesz pomocy z Infiniti EX35 - 2011, zadaj pytanie poniżej, a inni użytkownicy Ci odpowiedzą

Twoje imię*

Twój email*

Napisz tutaj swoje pytanie

Instrukcje Samochód osobowy Infiniti

Infiniti QX60 - 2014 Instrukcja

3 Lipca 2024

Infiniti QX50 - 2014 Instrukcja

3 Lipca 2024

Infiniti M - 2013 Instrukcja

2 Lipca 2024

Infiniti Q50 - 2014 Instrukcja

1 Lipca 2024

Infiniti M45 - 2007 Instrukcja

1 Lipca 2024

Infiniti Q40 - 2015 Instrukcja

1 Lipca 2024

Infiniti EX35 - 2011 Instrukcja

1 Lipca 2024

Infiniti QX60 - 2015 Instrukcja

1 Lipca 2024

Infiniti Q60 Coupe - 2014 Instrukcja

1 Lipca 2024

Infiniti Q70 Hybrid - 2014 Instrukcja

1 Lipca 2024

Instrukcje Samochód osobowy

Najnowsze instrukcje dla Samochód osobowy

Kia Cee-d Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Kia Carens 1 Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Kia Carens II Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Kia e-Soul - 2019 Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Audi A1 Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Audi Q3 Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Audi S5 Cabriolet Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Audi A5 Coupe - 2015 Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Audi S3 Instrukcja

28 Września 2024

Audi Q7 Instrukcja

28 Września 2024